- Home
- Domestic appliances
- Climate control
- Split-system air conditioners
- FloAire
- RTU-FA DOAS
- User manual
advertisement
Packaged Rooftop Unit - DOAS RTU Series
Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Manual
WARNING! FIRE OR EXPLOSION HAZARD
• Failure to follow safety warnings exactly could result in serious injury, death or property damage.
• Make sure to read and understand the installation, operation and service instructions in this manual.
• Improper installation, adjustment, alteration, service or maintenance can cause serious injury, death or property damage.
• Read the installation, operating and maintenance instructions thoroughly before installing or servicing this equipment. ALWAYS disconnect power and gas prior to working on unit.
FOR YOUR SAFETY
Do not store or use gasoline or other flammable vapors and liquids in the vicinity of this or any other appliance. Installation and service must be performed by a qualified installer, service agency or gas supplier.
WHAT TO DO IF YOU SMELL GAS:
• Do not try to light any appliance. Do not touch any electrical switch; do not use any phone in your building.
• Leave the building immediately. Immediately call your gas supplier from a phone remote from the building.
• Follow the gas supplier’s instructions. If you cannot reach your gas supplier, call the fire department.
IMPORTANT
Some units may contain an energy recovery wheel. By virtue of their design, all energy recovery wheels allow a level of return/exhaust air and contaminants to be recirculated into the supply airstream. Accepting and operating this unit with or without the energy recovery wheel in operation increases the risk of airborne bacteria, virus and contaminant spread between the return/exhaust air, into the fresh airstream.
In accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE/ASHE Standard 170-2017, energy recovery wheel technology should not be used as a means of ventilation for certain Health Care Facilities. An ASHRAE Position Document on
Infectious Aerosols, approved by ASHRAE Board of Directors, dated April 14, 2020, also recommends that energy recovery devices be bypassed for non-health care facility ventilation to help reduce the spread of virus.
Any reduction of outdoor air % or volume below what this unit was designed for elevates the risk of airborne bacteria, virus and contaminant recirculation back into the fresh airstream and the space.
Operating this unit with an exhaust level less than 50% of the supply level nullifies all return on investment statements and limits the amount of energy recovery.
This unit, including the energy recovery wheel, must be serviced and maintained as per the Installation and
Operation Manual’s recommended frequencies.
RECEIVING AND INSPECTION
Upon receiving unit, check for any interior and exterior damage, and if found, report it immediately to the carrier. Check that all accessory items are accounted for and free of damage. Turn the blower wheel by hand to verify free rotation and check the damper (if supplied) for free operation.
A0033507
April 2022 Rev 0 7
2
WARRANTY ......................................................................................4
Coastal Applications .......................................................................4
Furnace Warranty ...........................................................................4
CERTIFICATIONS .............................................................................4
Listings and Standards ...................................................................4
INSTALLATION .................................................................................5
Mechanical .....................................................................................5
Inspection on Arrival ...................................................................5
Unit Location - Site Preparation ..................................................5
Rigging ...........................................................................................8
Curb and Ductwork .........................................................................9
Duct Hanger Dimensions ..........................................................11
Curb and Adapter .........................................................................13
Supply Duct Pad Mount Clearances ............................................14
Duct Static Pressure Control .....................................................15
Typical Submittal Drawing ........................................................16
Furnace Condensation Drain .......................................................17
Cooling Coil Trap ......................................................................18
Heat Drain Kit ............................................................................18
High Turndown Furnace ...........................................................19
Strainer .....................................................................................20
High Altitude and Gas Type Orifice Sizing ...................................21
LP Conversion Kit for RTU Series ................................................23
Pre-Conversion Unit Check-Out ...................................................24
Gas Conversion Instruction .......................................................25
Electrical .......................................................................................26
Building to Unit Power Wiring Connection ................................27
Site Preparation – Controls .......................................................27
HMI and Remote Room Sensor Installation ..............................28
Typical Wiring Schematic ..........................................................29
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) ..................................................30
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Installation .............................30
Input AC Power .........................................................................30
VFD Output Power ....................................................................31
VFD Programming ....................................................................31
ACTECH SMV VFD ..................................................................32
Make-up Air (MUA) Board Connectors .....................................33
Optional Components ...................................................................44
AC Interlock ..............................................................................44
Burner Interlock .........................................................................44
Electric Cabinet Heater .............................................................44
Component Location ....................................................................44
Electric Heater Option ...............................................................51
Compressor Information ...............................................................52
VZH 044/035/028 ......................................................................52
Compressor VZH 065 ...............................................................52
Compressor VZH 088/117/170 .................................................53
Compressor Drive Information ......................................................54
CDS803 Quick Menu Navigation ..............................................54
CDS803 Main Menu Navigation ................................................54
CDS302/303 Quick Menu navigation ........................................55
CDS302/303 Main Menu ...........................................................55
OPERATION ....................................................................................56
HMI Configuration Menu Access ..................................................56
Remote (HMI) Control Panel .....................................................56
HMI Notification Letters .............................................................56
Configuring HMI ...........................................................................57
Communication .........................................................................57
Advanced Options .....................................................................57
Status ........................................................................................57
About .........................................................................................57
Scheduling ................................................................................58
Fan Speed and Damper Position Presets ....................................58
Menu Descriptions ........................................................................59
UNIT OPERATION ..........................................................................78
Start-Up Procedure ...................................................................78
Start-Up Procedure Heating .........................................................79
Table of Contents
Furnace Start-Up Summary ......................................................79
High Fire Burner Adjustment .....................................................79
Low-Fire Burner Adjustment .....................................................80
Final Start-Up Procedure ..........................................................80
Sequence of Operation ................................................................81
Operation Summary - Gas Heating ...........................................81
Flame Safety Control (FSC) .........................................................82
Modulating Stage Sequence ........................................................82
MUA Board and High Fire Start ....................................................82
Re-Circulating Control Options .....................................................83
Powered Exhaust .........................................................................83
Outdoor Air Configuration .............................................................83
Programmable Thermostat ...........................................................83
Heating, Cooling, Defrost, and Reheat .........................................84
Economizer ..................................................................................87
Psychrometric Chart .....................................................................88
Fixed Dry Bulb Economizer .....................................................88
Differential Dry Bulb Economizer .............................................88
Fixed Total Economizer ............................................................89
Differential Total Economizer ....................................................89
Energy Recovery (Optional) .........................................................90
Purge and Pressurization .............................................................90
Drive Motor ...............................................................................91
Frost Protection (Optional) ........................................................91
Variable Speed Frost Prevention ..............................................91
Energy Recovery Exhaust Hoods ................................................91
Exhaust Fan .................................................................................91
Slide-Out Wheel ...........................................................................91
Field Installation of Large ERVs ...................................................92
Network ........................................................................................94
BACnet ......................................................................................94
Device Instance, MAC Address, Baud Rate .............................95
Changing the IP Address ..........................................................96
LonWorks ..................................................................................97
DDC Control Points (BACnet) ......................................................98
DDC Notes ..............................................................................102
DDC Faults .............................................................................103
SERVICE INFORMATION .............................................................105
Basic Service ..............................................................................105
Monitoring the A/C System .....................................................105
Monitoring with Gauge Set ......................................................106
Recovering Refrigerant from the System ................................106
Nitrogen Purging .....................................................................107
Pressure Testing .....................................................................107
Evacuating the System ...........................................................107
Charging an Empty System ....................................................108
Charging System Low on Refrigerant .....................................109
Removing Manifold Gauge Set ...............................................109
Troubleshooting ..........................................................................110
System Troubleshooting Chart ...............................................110
HMI Fault Codes .....................................................................111
Compressor Drive VFD Troubleshooting Chart ..........................115
Compressor Troubleshooting Chart ...........................................117
Airflow Troubleshooting Chart ....................................................118
Furnace Troubleshooting Chart ..................................................119
Superheat and Subcooling .........................................................120
Component Check/Testing .........................................................121
MAINTENANCE ............................................................................133
General Maintenance .................................................................133
Every 3 Months .......................................................................133
Heating Season ......................................................................134
Cooling Season .......................................................................134
Maintenance Quick Reference Chart ......................................134
Coil Cleaning Procedure .........................................................135
Filters ......................................................................................136
Start-Up and Maintenance Documentation ................................140
3
WARRANTY
This unit comes with a standard 5-year parts warranty from date of shipment to be free from defects in materials and workmanship, under normal use and service. An extended 10-year non-prorated parts warranty is available at no extra charge when units are remotely monitored and maintained through a
Service Preventative Maintenance subscription (terms and conditions apply).
This warranty shall not apply if:
1. The equipment is not installed by a qualified installer per the MANUFACTURER’S installation instructions shipped with the product.
2. The equipment is not installed in accordance with Federal, State, and/or Local codes and regulations.
3. The equipment is misused or neglected, or not maintained per the MANUFACTURER’S maintenance instructions.
4. The equipment is not operated within its published capacity.
5. The invoice is not paid within the terms of the sales agreement.
The MANUFACTURER shall not be liable for incidental and consequential losses and damages potentially attributable to malfunctioning equipment. Should any part of the equipment prove to be defective in material or workmanship within the standard 5-year warranty period or the extended 10-year Preventative
Maintenance subscription, upon examination by the MANUFACTURER, such part will be repaired or replaced by MANUFACTURER at no charge. The BUYER shall pay all labor costs incurred in connection with such repair or replacement. Equipment shall not be returned without MANUFACTURER’S prior authorization, and all returned equipment shall be shipped by the BUYER, freight prepaid to a destination determined by the MANUFACTURER.
NOTE: To receive warranty coverage, register this product by filling out the Start-up and
Maintenance Document on page 139. Fax the form to 1-919-554-9374 or call 1-866-784-6900 for
email information.
Coastal Applications
Units installed within 1-mile of salt-water coasts and waterways must be equipped with an E-Coated
Outdoor Coil. Position the unit so the fresh air inlet and outdoor coil are protected from direct salt spray.
Failure to protect the fresh air inlet and outdoor coil from direct salt spray will void the unit’s warranty.
Furnace Warranty
Subject to all terms stated herein, the MANUFACTURER warrants to BUYER the stainless steel heat exchanger to be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for ï€
25-years from the date of manufacture and warranty is limited to replacement of the heat exchanger only.
CERTIFICATIONS
Listings and Standards
This unit is ETL-listed to the following standards:
• Standard for Safety Heating and Cooling Equipment ANSI/UL 1995, CSA 22.2 no. 236
• American National Standard/CSA Standard for Gas Unit Heaters and Gas-Fired Duct Furnaces ANSI
Z83.8-2016, CSA 2.6-2016
This unit has been tested in accordance to the following standards:
• ANSI/AHRI Standard 340/360 – 2007
• ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 37 – 2009
4
INSTALLATION
It is imperative that this unit is installed and operated with the designed airflow, gas, and electrical supply in accordance with this manual. If there are any questions about any items, please call the service department at 1-866-784-6900 for warranty and technical support issues.
IMPORTANT
For gas units, to prevent premature heat exchanger failure, do not locate any gas fired unit in areas where chlorinated, halogenated, or acid vapors are present in the atmosphere.
Mechanical
Inspection on Arrival
1. Inspect unit on delivery.
2. Photograph any visible damage.
3. Report any damage to the delivery carrier.
4. Request a written inspection report from the Claims Inspector to substantiate a claim.
5. File a claim with the delivery carrier.
6. Check unit’s rating plate to verify proper electric and fuel type to meet job requirements.
7. Compare unit received with description of product ordered.
Unloading/Moving Unit
WARNING!
Verify the forklift’s rated capacity can handle the equipment’s weight. Operators are not to pick up and move loads that are unbalanced or too heavy.
• The forklift’s forks must pass through the unit’s forklift pockets and out through the other side.
• Blank off plates are installed at the factory to ensure the unit is lifted as its proper center of gravity.
• The unit must be moved slowly, approximately raised 6-8” off of the ground.
Unit Location - Site Preparation
• Do not locate any gas-fired equipment near corrosive, explosive vapors such as chlorinated or acid vapors.
• Avoid overhead power lines, or other utility access points to prevent accidental contact or damage.
• Provide clearance around the installation site to safely rig and lift the equipment into its final position onto adequate supports. Refer to the manufacturer’s estimated weights.
• Consider general service and installation space when locating the unit.
• Locate the unit close to the space it will serve to reduce long and twisted duct runs.
• Do not allow the air intake to face prevailing winds. The airflow switch may trip in high winds.
• Situate the unit above ground or at roof level high enough to prevent precipitation from being drawn into its inlet.
• The inlet must also be located at least 10 feet away from any exhaust vents.
• The inlet must be in accordance with the applicable building code provisions for ventilation air.
• The unit must have adequate structural support, or the equipment or building could be damaged.
• Do not alter or otherwise restrict combustion or ventilation openings.
5
CLEARANCE TO COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS
This equipment may be installed with clearances from the equipment to combustible material not less than 0 inches from the top, bottom, condenser side, front and back. The flue side must be
installed 3 feet from combustible materials. Refer to Figure 1 for clearance details.
SERVICE CLEARANCE
For service accessibility and performance, this unit must have at least 3 feet of clearance on the intake and supply sides. Size 1, 2, and 3 units should have 3 feet of clearance on the condensing coil side, and size 4 units should have 4 feet. Clearance above condenser fans should be at least
10 feet. Refer to Figure 1 for clearance details.
Figure 1 - Unit Clearance
Size 1, 2, and 3 Unit Clearance
REPLACE HANDLE LOCKING
HARDWARE AFTER OPENING/SERVICING
CLEARANCE TO
COMBUSTIBLES 0 FT.
SERVICE
CLEARANCE 3 FT.
CLEARANCE TO
COMBUSTIBLES 0 FT.
CLEARANCE TO
COMBUSTIBLES 0 FT.
SERVICE
CLEARANCE 3 FT.
SERVICE CLEARANCE AND
CLEARANCE TO
COMBUSTIBLES 3 FT.
Size 4 Unit Clearance
REPLACE HANDLE LOCKING
HARDWARE AFTER OPENING/SERVICING
CLEARANCE TO
COMBUSTIBLES 0 FT.
SERVICE
CLEARANCE 3 FT.
CLEARANCE TO
COMBUSTIBLES 0 FT.
CLEARANCE TO
COMBUSTIBLES 0 FT.
SERVICE
CLEARANCE 4 FT.
SERVICE CLEARANCE
AND CLEARANCE TO
COMBUSTIBLES 3 FT.
6
CLEARANCE TO COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS
This equipment may be installed with clearances from the equipment to combustible material not less than 0 inches from the top, bottom, condenser side, front and back. The flue side must be
installed 3 feet from combustible materials. Refer to Figure 2 for clearance details.
SERVICE CLEARANCE
For service accessibility and performance, this unit must have at least 3 feet of clearance on the intake and supply sides. Size 2 and 3 ERV units should have 3 feet of clearance on the condensing coil side, and size 4 ERV units should have 4 feet. Clearance above condenser fans should be at
least 10 feet. Refer to Figure 2 for clearance details.
Figure 2 - ERV Unit Clearances
Size 2 and 3 Unit Clearance
SERVICE
CLEARANCE
4 FT.
REPLACE HANDLE LOCKING
HARDWARE AFTER
OPENING/SERVICING
CLEARANCE TO
COMBUSTIBLES
0 FT.
CLEARANCE TO
COMBUSTIBLES 0 FT.
SERVICE
CLEARANCE 3 FT.
SERVICE
CLEARANCE
3 FT.
CLEARANCE TO
COMBUSTIBLES 0 FT.
SERVICE CLEARANCE
AND CLEARANCE TO
COMBUSTIBLES 3 FT.
Size 4 Unit Clearance
SERVICE
CLEARANCE
4 FT.
CLEARANCE TO
COMBUSTIBLES
0 FT.
SERVICE
CLEARANCE
3 FT.
CLEARANCE TO
COMBUSTIBLES 0 FT.
REPLACE HANDLE LOCKING
HARDWARE AFTER
OPENING/SERVICING
CLEARANCE TO
COMBUSTIBLES 0 FT.
SERVICE
CLEARANCE 4 FT.
SERVICE CLEARANCE
AND CLEARANCE TO
COMBUSTIBLES 4 FT.
7
Rigging
WARNING!!
Ensure that all the lifting equipment used is properly rated for the weight of the unit being lifted.
Each of the cables (chains or slings), hooks, and shackles used to lift the unit must be capable of supporting the entire weight of the unit. Lifting cables (chains or slings) may not be of the same length. Adjust as necessary for even unit lift. Other lifting arrangements could cause equipment or property damage. Failure to follow instructions above or properly lift unit could result in unit dropping and possibly crushing operator/ technician which could result in death or serious injury.
Spreader bars must be used and should extend past the edges of the equipment to avoid damage to the
casing. Not using spreader bars may cause damage to the unit casing. Refer to Figure 3
for rigging details.
WARNING: DO NOT LIFT UNIT BY THE INTAKE LOUVER, OR DOOR OPENINGS – USE ALL LIFTING
POINTS PROVIDED WITH A SPREADER BAR OR SLINGS UNDER THE UNIT – USE CARE NOT TO
DAMAGE COILS, SWITCHES OR PROTRUDING SHEET METAL COMPONENTS.
• Units are supplied with four lifting eyes on the bottom corners of the structural rails.
• Always use spreader bars to prevent damage to the unit casing.
• Test lift the unit approximately 2 feet to verify proper center of gravity lift point. To avoid dropping unit, re-position lifting point if unit is not level. Failure to properly lift unit could result in unit dropping and possibly crushing operator/technician, which could result in death or serious injury and possible equipment or property-only damage.
Figure 3 - Rigging (Size 2 Unit Shown)
Spreader
Bar
Lifting Eyes
Located in 4 Corners
Lifting Eyes
Located in 4 Corners
Lifting Eyes
Located in 4 Corners
Forklift
Pockets
8
Curb and Ductwork
WARNING!!
Failure to properly size ductwork may cause system effects and reduce the performance of the equipment.
This unit was specified for a specific CFM and static pressure. The ductwork attached to this unit will significantly affect airflow performance. When using rectangular ductwork, elbows must be radius throat, radius back with turning vanes. Flexible ductwork and square throat/square back elbows should not be used. Any transitions and/or turns in the ductwork near the fan outlet will cause system effect. System effect will drastically increase the static pressure and reduce airflow.
Table 1 and Table 2 detail the
minimum fan outlet duct sizes required for optimal fan performance.
Unit Size
1
2
3
4
Table 1 - Recommended Supply Ductwork Sizes Up/Down Discharge
Up/Down
Discharge Duct
Size (Inches)
21-1/4” x 19-1/4”
20-1/4” x 30-1/4”
39” x 21-1/2”
39-3/4” x 39.5” (Up)
39-3/4” x 31” (Down)
Down Return Duct
Size (Inches)
Side Return
Duct Size (Inches)
28” x 10”
36” x 9”
45-1/2” x 13-1/2”
74 x 12-1/4”
29” x 10-1/2”
36-1/4” x 11-1/4”
45-1/2” x 10-3/4”
76-1/2” x 16-1/4”
Straight Duct
Length
54”
54”
78”
96”
Table 2 - Recommended Supply Ductwork Sizes Side Discharge
Unit Size
3
4
1
2
Side Discharge
Duct Size (Inches)
20” x 19-1/4”
20” x 14”
25” x 14”
34” x 21-1/4”
Down Return Duct
Size (Inches)
28” x 10”
36” x 9”
45-1/2” x 13-1/2”
74” x 12-1/4”
Side Return
Duct Size (Inches)
29” x 10-1/2”
36-1/4” x 11-1/4”
45-1/2” x 10-3/4”
76-1/2” x 16-1/4”
Straight Duct
Length
48”
48”
54”
78”
• Follow SMACNA guides and manufacturer’s requirements for the remaining duct run. Units designed for rooftop installation should be installed on a prefabricated or factory-built roof curb. Follow curb manufacturer’s instructions for proper curb installation.
• Do not use unit to support ductwork in any way. This may cause damage to the unit .
• If installed in a geographical area where snow accumulates, the unit should be installed on a curb and/ or rail elevated not less than 12-inches above any surface. Verify installation meets local code height requirements.
• Verify duct connection and unit supply outlet are properly aligned and sealed. Use gasket between the curb and unit (
).
• The curb and unit must be level, or the unit may leak or be damaged. If necessary, use shims to level the unit. Shims may be required depending upon curb installation and roofing material.
• Secure unit to curb with all available mounting points through vertical portion of the base assembly rails (
Figure 4 ). Use lug screws, anchor bolts, or other suitable fasteners (not furnished).
• Check all fasteners are secure and tight.
9
Figure 4 - Curb
Gasket
Curb
Curb Attachment
Point
Side Return Duct/Access Panel Install, refer to Figure 5 Detail A.
• Install gasket material around the upper and side edges.
• Install ductwork using self-tapping screws.
• Use caulk/sealant around the upper and side edges.
• Do not use caulk/sealant on the lower edge. Use only self-tapping screws to mount ductwork.
Side Discharge Duct Install, refer to
Detail B.
• Mount ductwork to the lip of the side discharge opening.
• Use self-tapping screws to secure ductwork.
• Verify the ductwork is clear for opening the top access panel door.
Figure 5 - Side Discharge, Side Return
Detail A Detail B
2
3
2
3
1
4
5
4
1. Discharge Outlet
2. Upper Edge - Use gasket/sealant for side return duct or access panel.
3. Side Edges - Use gasket/sealant for side return duct or access panel.
4. Damper Drain Holes - DO NOT COVER.
5. Lower Edge - DO NOT USE gasket/sealant.
10
Duct Hanger Dimensions
provides details for standard curbs, and
provides details for ERV curbs. Refer to
and
Table 4 on page 12 for Bill of Materials and curb dimensions.
Use 1/4”-20 x 5/8” Phillips pan head screws and nuts when assembling duct hangers, refer to
Figure 6 - Standard Curb
C
B
A
2
3
1
E
INTAKE
END
RETURN
1
2
DISCHARGE
G
3 F
D
Figure 7 - ERV Curb
2
2
3
ENERGY RECOVERY
VENTILATOR END
F
1
RETURN
1
H
DISCHARGE
3
G
E
D
C
B
A
11
Ref
1
2
3
Size 1
RTU1DHR = Quantity x 1
RTU1DHL = Quantity x 3
RTU1DHD = Quantity x 2
Table 3 - Duct Hanger Bill of Materials
Size 2
RTU2DHR = Quantity x 2
RTU2DHL = Quantity x 3
NOTE: ERV Quantity x 4
RTU2DHD = Quantity x 2
Size 3
RTU3DHR = Quantity x 1
RTU3DHL = Quantity x 3
NOTE: ERV Quantity x 4
RTU3DHD = Quantity x 2
Size 4
N/A
RTU4DHL = Quantity x 3
NOTE: ERV Quantity x 4
RTU4DHD = Quantity x 2
Reference
G
H
E
F
C
D
A
B
Size 1
12-3/4”
36-1/4”
59-1/4”
N/A
31-1/4”
5-1/4”
27-3/4”
N/A
Table 4 - Duct Hanger Curb Dimensions
Size 2
12-1/4”
33-3/8”
55-1/2”
1-3/4”
39-1/2”
3-3/8”
35-3/8”
N/A
Size 2 ERV
18”
40-1/4”
60-1/4”
73-7/8”
1-3/4”
39-1/2”
7-3/8”
29-1/8”
Size 3
16-5/8”
48-1/8”
71-5/8”
N/A
48-3/8”
2-3/4”
43-1/2”
N/A
Size 3 ERV
17-7/8”
41-3/8”
72”
90”
N/A
40-3/8”
2-5/8”
43-1/2”
Non ERV Curb
Figure 8 - Duct Hanger Assembled
ERV Curb
Size 4
15-1/2”
60-1/4”
93-3/4”
N/A
N/A
29-3/8”
70-3/4”
N/A
Size 4 ERV
15-5/8”
49-3/8”
93-7/8”
110”
N/A
N/A
29-3/8”
70-7/8”
Figure 9 - Plenum Curb Installation
The plenum curbs ( Figure 9 ) have a divider installed separating the
discharge from the return.
*When cutting the plenum curb, do not cut through the plenum divider.*
*Avoid cutting two adjacent sides at the same corner of the curb. This may weaken the curb structure.*
Mark and cut through the plenum panels and insulation to fit up with the ductwork connections.
-Do NOT cut the side panels within 4" of each corner, top, bottom, or center.
-Do NOT cut the base panels within 2" of each side or center.
-Cutting outside of the allowable boxes shown above may weaken the curb structure.
Secure the duct to the plenum curb opening(s). Verify all seams have been fully sealed.
Tape all cut edges of the insulation to secure it to the curb.
Curb Side Penetrations
4" MIN to Top, Bottom,
Corners, and Center
On ALL SIDE Panels
Plenum
Side
Plenum
Bas e
Plenum
Divider
Plenum
Side
Ple num
Bas e
Curb Base Penetrations
2" MIN to Sides and Center
12
Curb and Adapter
Figure 10 provides details when mounting return and supply duct adapters to an RTU curb.
Figure 10 - Curb and Adapter Details
Secure Supply Duct Adapter to
Inside Flange of Duct Hangers
1. Standard RTU Curb
2. Duct Hangers
3. Return Duct Adapter
4. Supply Duct Adapter
5. Gasket
6. 1/4”-20 x 3/4” Self Drilling Screws
2
Curb Length 6
1
6
2
Curb Width
5
4
Secure Return Duct
Adapter to Inside Curb
Flange & Duct Hangers 3
5
NOTE: Adapters provided by manufacturer are insulated with R6 panels. It is recommended adapters by others are insulated with R6 to prevent condensation from forming around ductwork.
13
Supply Duct Pad Mount Clearances
When a unit will be pad mounted, refer to Figure 11
for details on installation. Always verify the distance from the wall(s) to the unit. For the supply side of the unit, there must be adequate distance between the door and duct to service components.
The minimum unsupported distance for vertical ductwork is 20’. Anything over 20’ requires a wall support bracket. 40’ of vertical ductwork requires two wall support brackets, 60’ would require three wall supports, etc.
A saddle support is required for horizontal duct runs. Center the saddle support to prevent stress on connections. Additional saddle supports are recommended every 15’.
Figure 11 - Supply Duct Installation Details
D
E 10
6
7
8
G
9
4
C
F
A
B
5
4
11
2
3
1. RTU Unit
2. RTU Stand
3. Saddle Support
4. Double Wall Supply Duct
5. Interior Space
6. Exterior Wall
7. Adjustable Duct (Recommended)
8. Closure Plate (Inside/Outside)
9. Wall Support Bracket - Required for vertical ductwork lengths over 20’.
10. Double Wall Return Duct
11. Discharge Adapter - Verify the adapter is installed properly. The door above should be able to open without any interference.
1
5
D
6
D
3
F
3
A
B
11
A. Door Opening Distance:
• Size 1 = 24-1/2”
• Size 2/3 = 25- 1/2”
• Size 4 = 48-1/2”
B. Adapter Height = 24”
C. Minimum Unsupported Distance = 10’
D. Minimum Exterior Duct Penetration = 4”
E. Horizontal Support Recommended = Every 15’ for Single Wall, every 8’ for Double Wall
F. Minimum Distance Unit to Wall (Supply Side)
• Size 1 = 62”
• Size 2/3 = 70”
• Size 4 = 98”
G. Minimum Distance Unit to Wall (Return Side)
• Size 1 = 62”
• Size 2/3 = 70”
• Size 4 = 98”
14
Duct Static Pressure Control
Units equipped with an Electrically Controlled Motors (ECMs) or Variable Frequency Drives (VFDs) driven supply fan, the duct static pressure control option can be used to monitor duct pressure.
1. Locate where the pressure transducer is installed in the control cabinet.
2. Install the static pitot tube in a straight section of ductwork where the airflow is laminar and consistent.
3. Connect the high side tubing to the static pitot tube.
4. Route the tubing through the bottom of the unit to the high side port on the pressure transducer.
5. The low side pressure tubing will be connected to a brass port, located by the control cabinet doors.
This will be connected from the factory.
Figure 12 - Duct Static Pressure Control Details
High Side
Pressure Tubing
Pressure Transducer
Located in Control Cabinet
Low Side
Pressure Tubing
To Brass Port Located by Control
Cabinet Doors.
Ductwork
Static Pitot Tube
Airflow from
Supply Fan
15
Typical Submittal Drawing
16
Furnace Condensation Drain
In some applications, condensation can form in the flue collection box, especially when furnaces are located downstream of cooling coils or operate in a high-efficiency range. If condensation occurs in the flue collection box, there are fittings in the bottom of the flue collection box to drain condensation out of the box.
The burner in the unit is provided with a condensation drain assembly located underneath this fitting for the condensation to collect. The drain will need to be connected to field piping to handle the condensation properly.
Consult your local code as to the proper drainage regulations of the condensation. A heated drain option is available to prevent the internal drain piping from freezing. If drains are field piped, ensure that the field piping is piped in a fashion to prevent the condensation from freezing. Do not plug the holes under any circumstance as it will cause the burners to overflow.
The standard efficiency furnace drain (
detail A) is piped to the exterior of the unit via 5/16” silicone tubing. A 1/4” female NPT fitting is provided external to the unit to allow for field piping if required.
If piping is added to the unit, freeze protection should be added to prevent damage to the field-installed piping.
The high-efficiency furnace drain (
detail B) is fitted with a condensation float switch assembly, located in the bottom main cabinet, from the factory. A condensation drain must be field piped through the base of the unit using 3/4” PVC schedule 80 smooth fittings per the above requirements. A 2” deep trap must be field installed downstream of the unit to ensure adequate flow.
NOTE: Seal ALL base penetrations with appropriate filler (caulk or all-purpose putty) to prevent water from entering the space.
Figure 13 - Condensation Drain(s)
Standard Efficiency Drain - Detail A High-Efficiency Drain - Detail B
2
3
4
1
5
1. Standard efficiency drain connection. 1/4” NPT trap recommended.
2. 1/2”, 3/4”, or 1” NPT gas connection depending on furnace size.
3. Factory-installed high-efficiency condensation float switch assembly and wiring.
4. High-efficiency drain connection. 3/4” PVC schedule 80.
5. After drain pipe installation, seal base penetrations with an appropriate filler.
To test the factory-installed condensation float switch assembly:
• Turn the unit on, start the heating system. If the heating system does not run, verify the condensation float switch assembly wiring is correct.
• Remove the condensation float switch from the assembly. Lift the switching arm with a screwdriver.
The heating system should shut off immediately. If not, check that the condensation float switch assembly’s wiring connections are secure and tight. Re-check the float switch for proper operation.
17
Cooling Coil Trap
There is a field plumbing connection that is required for the DX/cooling coil. This connection is for the drain pan located under the DX/cooling coil. Also, it is recommended that all plumbing connections be sealed with Teflon tape or pipe dope.
Install Condensate Trap Assembly to 1” threaded drain pan connection. Use low-profile couplings and 1”
PVC piping to connect on-site drainage to the Condensate Trap Assembly. DO NOT USE UNIONS . The
Condensate Trap Assembly is important for two reasons. First, it will allow drainage to be piped to the most convenient area. Second, it will keep air from being drawn into the system, impeding drainage. The top lids of the Condensate Trap Assembly should be removable to allow for cleaning of the trap.
Figure 14 - Condensate Trap Assembly Details
Minimum 1"
4” Trap Height
Heat Drain Kit
Units equipped with the Extreme Low Ambient option will include 50 feet of self-regulated heated cable.
The heated cable will ship loose, and will need to be field-wired. The entire length of pipe exposed to ambient air should be wrapped in heated cable and insulated with foam pipe insulation, starting from the drain pan nipple and including the condensate drain assembly. The cable should run along the length of the pipe to be heated. If the cable is longer than the pipe, then the cable can be spiraled along the length of the pipe. The heat cable should be installed with zip ties. Wiring will be the responsibility of the installer.
Condensate Trap
Figure 15 - Heated Drain Kit Details
To Drainage Area
Zip Tie Heated cable mounted long bottom of the pipe
Spiral the heated cable along the pipe if the length of the cable is too long
Field connected to 120V outlet
Zip Tie
Foam Pipe Insulation
18
Gas
Installation of gas piping must conform with local building codes, or in the absence of local codes to the
National Fuel Gas Code, ANSI Z223.1 (NFPA 54) – latest edition. In Canada, installation must be in accordance with CAN/CGA-B149.1 for natural gas units and CAN/CGA-B149.2 for propane units.
WARNING: Inlet gas pressure must not exceed pressure indicated on nameplate. See unit nameplate for proper gas supply pressure and gas type.
1.
Always disconnect power before working on or near a heater. Lock and tag the disconnect switch and/or breaker to prevent accidental power-up .
2. Piping to the unit should conform to local and national requirements for type and volume of gas handled, and pressure drop allowed in the line. Refer to the Gas Engineer’s Handbook for gas line capacities.
3. The incoming pipe near the heater should be sized to match the connection on the outside of the unit.
Connection size is 1/2”, 3/4”, or 1” NPT depending on furnace size.
See “Condensation Drain(s)”
Detail A on page 13. Verify unit inlet size to job-specific sheet.
Avoid multiple taps in the gas supply, so the unit always has a steady supply of gas.
4. Install a ground joint union with brass seat and a manual shut-off valve external to the unit casing.
.
5. Provide a sediment trap, as shown in
Figure 16 , before each unit and where low spots in the pipeline
cannot be avoided.
6. A minimum 1/8” NPT plugged tapping, accessible for test gauge connection, must be installed immediately upstream of the gas supply connection to the appliance.
7. The external gas regulator should not be installed where moisture from flue gases can accumulate or penetrate the regulator.
8. Clean out the gas line to remove debris before making connections. Purge line to remove air before attempting to start unit. Purging air from gas lines should be performed as described in ANSI Z223.1latest edition “National Fuel Gas Code,” or in Canada as described in CAN/CGA-B149.
9. All field gas piping must be pressure/leak tested before unit operation. Use a non-corrosive bubble forming solution or equivalent for leak testing. The heater and its individual shut-off valve must be disconnected from the gas supply piping system during any pressure testing of that system at test pressures over 1/2 psi. The heater must be isolated from the gas supply piping system by closing its individual manual shutoff valve during any pressure testing of the gas supply piping system at test pressures equal to or less than 1/2 psi.
10. This unit requires a constant 7” water column (wc) minimum for natural gas supply ( LP 11 in. wc minimum ) when the unit is operating at maximum gas flow. If the gas supply exceeds 14” wc , it will damage the internal valve components. If the gas supply drops below 7” wc ( LP 11 in. wc ), the heater may not perform to specifications.
Refer to Table 5 for gas pressure type and pressure rating.
NOTICE
Refer to the heater rating plate for determining the minimum gas supply pressure for obtaining the maximum gas capacity for which this heater is specified.
High Turndown Furnace
The high turndown furnace will be divided into two separate furnace assemblies within the same cabinet.
This results in a two stage heat source that can stage up and down to meet demand. Since the furnace is split unevenly, staging on the smallest will result in significantly higher turndown and greater control over building conditions. An additional Flame Safety Controller (FSC), safety valve, modulating valve, and high pressure switch (if equipped) will be installed.
19
Strainer
The strainer is used to prevent debris from entering the gas train. New piping must be used. Properly ream and clean metal burrs. Proper care is needed to ensure that the gas flow is in the same direction as indicated on the strainer. Do not over-tighten pipe connections. Use pipe dope on male threads only. Install a drip leg in the gas line in accordance with the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) guidelines.
Figure 16 - Gas Connection Diagram
1
1
2 B
4
To Unit
Gas Manifold
3
A
5
6
7
1. Gas Supply Line Connection
2. Manual Gas Shut-off Valve
3. Plugged 1/8” NPT Test Gauge Connection
4. Ground Joint Union with Brass Seat
5. Sediment Trap
6. Strainer
7. Unit
A. Minimum Depth = 6”
B. Maximum Length = 12”
Proper clearance must be provided in order to service the strainer. A minimum of a 4” clearance distance must be provided at the base of the strainer.
Table 5 - Gas Train Details
Gas Pressure Type
Inlet Pressure - Natural Gas
Inlet Pressure - Propane (LP)
Maximum Manifold Pressure - Natural Gas
Maximum Manifold Pressure - Propane (LP)
Minimum Manifold Pressure - Natural Gas
Minimum Manifold Pressure - Propane (LP)
Strainer
4417K64
4417K65
4417K66
4417K67
4417K68
4417K69
4417K71
Gas Pressure
7 - 14 Inches WC
11 - 14 Inches WC
3.5 Inches WC Maximum
10 Inches WC Maximum
0.15 Inches WC Maximum
0.75 Inches WC Maximum
Size
3/4”
1”
1-1/4”
1-1/2”
2”
2-1/2”
3”
20
High Altitude and Gas Type Orifice Sizing
The burner orifices should be sized per Table 6
and Table 7 , depending on fuel type, furnace size, and
altitude. Standard orifice sizes are for sea level. The unit should be ordered with the altitude specific orifices, or the parts should be ordered through the manufacturer (
). Refer to main gas valve documentation for instructions to convert gas valve spring from Natural to LP and vice versa.
NOTE: 50,000 – 100,000 BTU High-Efficiency Natural Gas furnaces use 2.3mm Drill Size at 0 – 3999 ft. Follow charts for all other altitudes.
Size 3
High Altitude for 500,000
BTU
Altitude
(Feet)
Input Rate
0 - 1,999
2,000 - 2,999
500,000
479,998
3,000 - 3,999 460,797
4,000 - 4,999 442,668
5,000 - 5,999 424,668
6,000 - 6,999 407,680
7,000 - 7,999
8,000 - 8,999
391,372
375,716
9,000 - 10,000 360,686
Drill Size
#33
#35
#35
#36
#36
#37
#38
#38
#40
Table 6 - Natural Gas High Altitude Charts
Natural Gas High Altitude Conversion
Size 2 and 3
High Altitude for 400,000
BTU
Size 1, 2, and 3
High Altitude for 300,000 to 50,000
BTU
Input Rate Drill Size
400,000
384,000
368,640
353,894
339,739
326,149
313,103
300,579
288,556
#41
#42
2.35mm
2.3mm
#43
2.25mm
#44
#45
#46
Input Rate Input Rate Input Rate
300,000
288,000
276,480
265,421
254,804
244,612
234,827
225,434
216,417
200,000
192,000
184,320
176,947
169,869
163,075
156,552
150,290
144,278
150,000
144,000
138,240
132,710
127,402
122,306
117,414
112,717
108,209
Drill Size
#3/32
2.35mm
2.3mm
#43
2.25mm
#44
2.15mm
#46
#47
Size 4
High Altitude for 600,000 BTU
Altitude
(Feet)
0 - 1,999
2,000 - 2,999
3,000 - 3,999
4,000 - 4,999
5,000 - 5,999
6,000 - 6,999
7,000 - 7,999
8,000 - 8,999
9,000 - 10,000
Input Rate
600,000
576,000
552,960
530,482
509,608
489,224
469,654
450,868
432,834
Drill Size
3.4mm
#30
#30
#30
#30
#30
#31
#31
#32
Natural Gas High Altitude Conversion
Size 4
High Altitude for 500,000 to 200,000 BTU
Input Rate
500,000
479,998
460,797
442,668
424,668
407,680
391,372
375,716
360,686
Input Rate
400,000
384,000
368,640
353,894
339,739
326,149
313,103
300,579
288,556
Input Rate
300,000
288,000
276,480
265,421
254,804
244,612
234,827
225,434
216,417
Input Rate
200,000
192,000
184,320
176,947
169,869
163,075
156,552
150,290
144,278
Drill Size
3.3mm
#30
#31
#31
#31
#31
#32
#32
#33
21
Size 3
High Altitude for 500,000
BTU
Altitude
(Feet)
Input Rate
0 - 1,999
2,000 - 2,999
3,000 - 3,999
4,000 - 4,999
5,000 - 5,999
6,000 - 6,999
7,000 - 7,999
500,000
479,998
460,797
442,668
424,668
407,680
391,372
8,000 - 8,999 375,716
9,000 - 10,000 360,686
Drill Size
1/16”
#53
#54
#54
#54
#54
#54
#55
#55
Table 7 - LP Gas High Altitude Charts
LP Gas High Altitude Conversion
Size 2 and 3
High Altitude for 400,000
BTU
Size 1, 2, and 3
High Altitude for 300,000 to 50,000 BTU
Input Rate Drill Size
400,000
384,000
368,640
353,894
339,739
326,149
313,103
300,579
288,556
1.45mm
#54
#54
#54
#54
#55
#55
#55
#56
Input Rate Input Rate Input Rate
300,000
288,000
276,480
265,421
254,804
244,612
234,827
225,434
216,417
200,000
192,000
184,320
176,947
169,869
163,075
156,552
150,290
144,278
150,000
144,000
138,240
132,710
127,402
122,306
117,414
112,717
108,209
Drill Size
#54
#54
#55
#55
#55
#55
#56
#56
#57
Size
#41
#42
#43
#44
#36
#37
#38
#40
#45
#46
#47
#48
#30
#31
#32
#33
#35
Size 4
High Altitude for 600,000 BTU
Altitude
(Feet)
0 - 1,999
2,000 - 2,999
3,000 - 3,999
4,000 - 4,999
5,000 - 5,999
6,000 - 6,999
7,000 - 7,999
8,000 - 8,999
9,000 - 10,000
Input Rate
600,000
576,000
552,960
530,482
509,608
489,224
469,654
450,868
432,834
Drill Size
#45
#46
#47
#47
#47
#48
#48
#49
#49
Part #
BG100-30
BG100-31
BG100-32
BG100-33
BG100-35
BG100-36
BG100-37
BG100-38
BG100-40
BG100-41
BG100-42
BG100-43
BG100-44
BG100-45
BG100-46
BG100-47
BG100-48
LP Gas High Altitude Conversion
Size 4
High Altitude for 500,000 to 200,000 BTU
Input Rate
500,000
479,998
460,797
442,668
424,668
407,680
391,372
375,716
360,686
Input Rate
400,000
384,000
368,640
353,894
339,739
326,149
313,103
300,579
288,556
Input Rate
300,000
288,000
276,480
265,421
254,804
244,612
234,827
225,434
216,417
Input Rate
200,000
192,000
184,320
176,947
169,869
163,075
156,552
150,290
144,278
Drill Size
#45
#46
#47
#47
#47
#48
#48
#49
#49
Table 8 - Orifice Part Numbers and Quantity Charts
Orifice Part Numbers
AX #
A0029277
A0029278
A0029279
A0029280
A0029281
A0030719
A0030721
A0030722
A0030723
A0023045
A0023050
A0023047
A0023046
A0028800
A0028801
A0028802
A0029282
Size
#49
#50
#53
#54
#55
#56
#57
1/16”
1.45mm
2.15mm
2.25mm
2.3mm
2.35mm
3.3mm
3.4mm
#3/32
Part #
BG100-49
BG100-50
BG100-53
BG100-54
BG100-55
BG100-56
BG100-57
BG100-116
BG101-16
BG101-21
BG101-20
BG101-05
BG101-19
BG101-08
BG101-09
BG101-3/32
AX #
A0029283
A0029284
A0030724
A0023048
A0023049
A0023057
A0028803
A0030725
A0023052
A0023055
A0023054
A0023051
A0023053
A0029285
A0030726
A0023044
Orifice Quantity per Furnace
Size 1, 2, and 3
50,000 BTU
75,000 BTU
100,000 BTU
125,000 BTU
150,000 BTU
200,000 BTU
300,000 BTU
400,000 BTU
500,000 BTU
N/A
Qty
4
5
6
2
3
8
12
15
15
-
Size 4 Qty
N/A -
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
-
-
200,000 BTU 4
300,000 BTU 6
400,000 BTU 8
500,000 BTU 10
600,000 BTU 11
-
-
22
LP Conversion Kit for RTU Series
LP/Natural Gas conversion kits are used to convert from one gas type to another in the field. This kit is used on all RTUs, and the part numbers in
Table 9 should be used on furnace sizes listed.
Kits contain:
• Main Safety Gas Valve Regulator Spring
• Furnace orifices marked with orifice size
This unit is configured for the gas type listed on the nameplate. To convert gas types, you must use the following parts listed in
Table 9 . The size-specific parts include the orifice conversion parts and the
combination gas valve spring(s). These parts are available by contacting the Parts & Service Department at 1 (866) 784-6900 . All field gas piping must be pressure/leak tested before unit operation. Use a noncorrosive bubble forming solution or equivalent for leak testing. The equipment and its individual shutoff valve must be disconnected from the gas supply piping system during any pressure testing of that system at test pressures in excess of 1/2 psi. The equipment must be isolated from the gas supply piping system by closing its individual manual shutoff valve during any pressure testing of the gas supply piping system at test pressures equal to or less than 1/2 psi. This must be performed on an annual basis.
Table 9 - Gas Conversion Kit Part Numbers
Furnace Size
Natural Gas
LP Gas
Modulating Valve
50 MBH
NAT-HMG50
LP-HMG50
75 MBH
NAT-HMG75
LP-HMG75
Size 1 Units
100 MBH
NAT-HMG100
125 MBH
NAT-HMG125
LP-HMG100
E50-1/2”
LP-HMG125
150 MBH
NAT-HMG150
LP-HMG150
200 MBH
NAT-HMG200
LP-HMG200
Furnace Size
Natural Gas
LP Gas
Modulating Valve
Size 2 and 3 Units
50 MBH 100 MBH 150 MBH 200 MBH 250 MBH 300 MBH 400 MBH 500 MBH
NAT-HMG50 NAT-HMG100 NAT-HMG150 NAT-HMG200 NAT-HMG250 NAT-HMG300 NAT-HMG400 NAT-HMG500
LP-HMG50 LP-HMG100 LP-HMG150 LP-HMG200 LP-HMG250 LP-HMG300 LP-HMG400 LP-HMG500
E50-3/4” E60-1”
Furnace Size
Natural Gas
LP Gas
Modulating Valve
200 MBH
NAT-HMA200
LP-HMA200
Size 4 Units
300 MBH
NAT-HMA300
LP-HMA300
E50-3/4”
400 MBH
NAT-HMA400
LP-HMA400
500 MBH
NAT-HMA500
LP-HMA500
E60-1”
600 MBH
NAT-HMA600
LP-HMA600
23
Pre-Conversion Unit Check-Out
The following procedure is intended as a guide to aid in determining that the appliance is properly installed and is in a safe condition for continuing use. It should be recognized that generalized test procedures cannot anticipate all situations. Accordingly, in some cases, deviation from this procedure may be necessary to determine safe operation of the equipment:
• This procedure should be performed before any attempt at modification of the appliance or the installation.
• If it is determined there is a condition that could result in unsafe operation, the appliance should be shut off, and the owner advised of the unsafe condition.
Follow these steps when making a safety inspection:
1. Conduct a gas leakage test of the appliance piping and control system downstream of the shut-off valve in the supply line to the appliance.
2. Visually inspect the venting system for proper size and horizontal pitch and determine there is no blockage or restrictions, leakage, corrosion, or other deficiencies that could cause an unsafe condition.
3. Shut off all gas to the appliance and shut off any other fuel-burning appliance within the same room.
Use the shut-off valve in the supply line to each appliance.
4. Inspect burners and crossovers for blockage and corrosion.
5. Inspect heat exchangers for cracks, openings, or excessive corrosion.
6. Insofar as is practical, close all windows and all doors between the space where the appliance is located and other spaces of the building. Turn on any exhaust fans so that they will operate at maximum speed. If it is believed sufficient combustion air is not available, refer to the section covering air for combustion, venting, and ventilation of Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code , CSA
B149.1, or National Fuel Gas Code , ANSI Z223.1/NFPA 54, for guidance.
7. Place the appliance in operation following the lighting instructions. Adjust thermostat so the appliance will operate continuously. Other fuel-burning appliances shall be placed in operation.
8. Determine that the pilot is properly burning and that the main burner ignition is satisfactory by interrupting and re-establishing the electrical supply to the appliance in any convenient manner.
• Visually determine that main burner gas is burning properly, i.e. no floating, lifting, or flashback.
Adjust the primary air shutter(s) as required.
• If the appliance is equipped with high- and low-flame control or flame modulation, check the main burner for proper operation at low flame.
9. Test for spillage at the draft hood relief opening after 5 minutes of main burner operation. Use a draft gauge, the flame of a match, or candle.
10. Return doors, windows, exhaust fans, and all other fuel-burning appliances to their previous conditions of use.
11. Check both limit control and fan control for proper operation. Limit control operation can be checked by temporarily disconnecting the electrical supply to the supply motor and determining that the limit control acts to shut off the main burner gas.
24
Gas Conversion Instruction
Warning
This conversion kit shall be installed by a qualified service agency in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and all applicable codes and requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. If the information in these instructions is not followed exactly, a fire, explosion or production of carbon monoxide may result causing property damage, personal injury or loss of life. The qualified service agency performing this work assumes the responsibility for the proper conversion of the appliance with this kit.
Follow the below steps when converting gas types, refer to Figure 17
for details:
1. Before proceeding with the conversion, shut off all gas supply to the unit at the manual shut-off valve.
2. Disconnect or shut off all electrical power to the unit.
3. Turn the thermostat to the lowest temperature setting.
4. Remove screws holding manifold pipe assembly to burner assembly.
5. Loosen and remove natural gas orifices, remove from manifold.
6. Install propane gas orifices provided with kit. Verify orifice sizes are correct.
7. Open Gas Valve Regulator conversion kit and follow instructions provided for conversion of gas valve regulator. Make sure to apply the label provided in the kit indicating that the valve has been converted. The spring tension is different for LP and Natural Gas. This is the main component difference.
8. Secure manifold assembly to burner assembly. Check that all orifices are aligned with the opening on each burner.
9. Turn on gas supply at manual shut-off valve.
10. Leak check union fitting and connection at gas valve using a soap solution.
11. Turn power to the unit “On.”
12. Initiate a heating cycle. Check inlet and manifold gas pressures.
13. A label is included in this kit to attach to the manifold indicating this assembly has been converted to
LP gas.
14. Attach label to manifold where it is readily visible when this assembly is accessed for service.
15. Verify proper sequence of operation for appliance after conversion is completed.
16. Verify proper gas inlet supply pressure and information on maximum and minimum supply pressures.
Figure 17 - Gas Valve(s)
Pressure Regulator Adjustment
(Under Cap)
Inlet
Pressure Tap
On/Off Gas Valve
Wiring
Terminals (2)
Outlet
Pressure Tap
Modulating Gas Valve
Cap Screw
- LP Gas = Black
- Natural = Silver
Pressure
Regulator
Adjusting Screw
Spring
- LP Gas = Red
- Natural = Stainless
Steel
Pressure Regulator
Housing
Inlet
Outlet
Gas Control
Knob
25
Electrical
WARNING!!
Disconnect power before installing or servicing control. High voltage electrical input is needed for this equipment. A qualified electrician should perform this work.
Before connecting power to the unit, read and understand the entire section of this document. As-built wiring diagrams are furnished with each control by the factory and are attached to the module’s door.
When installed, the appliance must be electrically grounded in accordance with local codes, or in the absence of local codes, with the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, and/or the Canadian
Electrical Code, CSA C22.1, if an external electrical source is utilized. Verify the voltage and phase of the power supply, and the wire amperage capacity is in accordance with the unit nameplate. Refer to
for wire size and amperage ratings.
• Always disconnect power before working on or near a unit. Lock and tag the disconnect switch and/or breaker to prevent accidental power-up .
• The main electrical feed should be brought through one of the conduit openings located in the base of the unit, within the perimeter of the curb. When installing wiring and conduit, make sure to route in front of the gas train. DO NOT ROUTE WIRING WITHIN THE SUPPLY OR RETURN DUCT.
KEEP
WIRING AND CONDUIT AT LEAST 1” AWAY FROM THE BURNER EXHAUST VENT. Refer to
• A dedicated branch circuit should supply the unit with short circuit protection according to the National
Electric Code.
• Make certain that the power source is compatible with the requirements of your equipment. The unit nameplate identifies the proper phase and voltage of the equipment.
• Units shipped with an optional remote HMI panel have separate wiring requirements. It is important to run the main electrical wires in a separate conduit from the remote control HMI wiring. The HMI wiring is Cat-5 and must be separate from power cable. Maximum distance on any low voltage wire is 1000 feet.
• Before connecting the unit to the building power source, verify power line wiring is de-energized.
• Secure the power cables to prevent contact with sharp objects.
• Do not kink power cable and never allow the cable to come in contact with oil, grease, hot surfaces, or chemicals.
• Before powering up the unit, check fan wheel for free rotation and make sure that the interior of the heater is free of loose debris or shipping materials.
• If any of the original wire supplied with the appliance needs to be replaced, it must be replaced with wiring material having a temperature rating of at least 149°F and type TW wire or equivalent.
• Seal ALL base penetrations with an appropriate filler (caulk or all-purpose putty) to prevent water from entering the space. Refer to
.
WARNING: Low Voltage Wiring Should Never Route Together With High Voltage Wiring.
Table 10 - Copper Wire Ampacity
Wire Size
14 AWG
12 AWG
10 AWG
8 AWG
6 AWG
4 AWG
3 AWG
2 AWG
1 AWG
Maximum Amps
15
20
30
50
65
85
100
115
130
Wire Size
1/0 AWG
2/0 AWG
3/0 AWG
4/0 AWG
250 MCM
300 MCM
350 MCM
400 MCM
500 MCM
600 MCM
Maximum Amps
150
175
200
230
255
285
310
335
380
420
26
Building to Unit Power Wiring Connection
Figure 18 - Conduit Termination/Disconnect Switch Wiring
Size 3 Unit Shown
Safety
Disconnect
Switch
Main Power to Unit’s
Safety Disconnect
Switch from Building
Breaker
Run Conduit to First Shelf
WARNING: KEEP WIRING
AND CONDUIT AT LEAST
1” AWAY FROM THE
BURNER EXHAUST VENT.
Gal-flex
Conduit
After Wiring Installation is
Complete, Seal All Base
Penetrations with
Appropriate Filler
208/460/600 V 3 PH.
Safety
Disconnect
Switch
Fused Disconnect Option
GR
Field
Supplied
Wiring
30A
Fused Disconnect Options
250V 480/600V Size
DG321NRB DG321NRB 1
60A DG322NRB DG322NRB 1, 2, 3
100A DG323NRB DG323NRB 1, 2, 3
Site Preparation – Controls
• Consider general service and installation space when locating the remote temperature control.
• Locate the control as close to the space/fan that it will serve to reduce long, unnecessary wire runs.
• Install thermostats in locations that will produce a good representation of the air being moved by the fan in the space. Avoid thermostat installations in direct sunlight, near HVAC supplies, or abnormal temperature airstreams.
27
HMI and Remote Room Sensor Installation
Remote HMI faceplates (
), remote room sensors (
), and smart controls may be ordered and shipped separately. These components measure temperature and assist in controlling the unit. These components should be installed in a safe location, free of influence from external heat sources.
Install sensors in areas indicative of the average room temperature. Keep sensor away from heatproducing appliances. HMIs and remote room sensors can be installed directly to industry-standard junction boxes, either surface mounted or recessed mounted. HMIs have a built-in temperature/relative humidity (RH) sensor, which is typically used to help control the automatic function of the unit.
The HMI can also be configured to control the unit from a remote location manually. They can be configured not to use the internal temperature/relative humidity sensor. In this configuration, the sensor in the HMI is ignored in automatic operation. Multiple HMIs can be connected to one unit for temperature and
R/H averaging. All combination temperature/humidity HMIs will use a vented standoff. Mount the static pressure tube close to the HMI to obtain proper room conditions.
A max of 4 additional HMIs can be daisy-chained together. Place an End-of-Line (EOL) device in the last
HMI connected.
Figure 19 - HMI with Standoff
HMI Standoff
J-Box
Static Pressure Tube
Connected to the High Pressure
Port on Pressure Sensor
Route the provided 1/4” nylon tubing close to the HMI in the space.
5-1/2”
Cat 5 Connection
J1 on HMI-1 to J2 on HMI-2
HMI with Built-in
Temperature/Humidity
Sensor
5-1/2”
The room temperature sensor is a 10K ohm thermistor. The sensor provides constant room temperature to the controller.
It should be installed on a wall somewhere in the room, but not directly in the HVAC diffuser’s path or close to heatproducing appliances so that the reading is not affected by heat.
Room sensors are not required for proper control operation, but still can be configured as remote sensors or averaging sensors.
Do not install the room sensor on the ceiling
.
Figure 20 - Remote Room Sensor
28
Typical Wiring Schematic
-
PWS-02 N
L
THERMISTORS THERMISTORS
WIRE
SHIELDED
T
69
68
61
BAS/STA
L1
L2
69
68
61
TR-01
RD
BR
RD
PR
BL
RD
BK
SHD
COM
VOUT
VIN
SW-15
SW-16
SW-17
24V
COM
VOUT
BC
BP
24V
VOUT
COM
24V
VOUT
COM
24V
VOUT
COM
(O/P)
(O/P)
24VAC
24VAC
WH
BK
(I/P)
(I/P)
IGNITOR
S1
HV
G
R
L
PSW
TH
IND
V1
V2
RD
BK
PR
YW
BR
GY
YW
RD
BK
SHD
PK
BL
BR
BR
OR
SW-04
SW-13
BL
SW-03
+
-
EC1-
VOUT
VIN
COM
VOUT
VIN
COM
24VDC
0-10V IN
COMMON
0-10V IN
24VDC
COMMON
N.O.
C
24VAC
24VAC
INPUT
COMMON
29
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)
WARNING!
- Before installing the VFD drive, ensure the input power supply to the drive is OFF.
- The power supply and motor wiring of the VFD must be completed by a qualified electrician.
- The VFD is factory programmed, only change if replaced or ordered separately.
Consult the VFD manual and all documentation shipped with the unit for proper installation and wiring of
the VFD. The VFD has been programmed by the factory with ordered specific parameters. Use Table 11
as a guide during installation.
Table 11 - VFD Installation Check List
Check
Off
Description
The installation environment conforms to the VFD manual.
The drive is mounted securely.
Space around the drive meets the drive’s specification for cooling.
The motor and driven equipment are ready to start.
The drive is properly grounded.
The input power voltage matches the drive’s nominal input voltage.
The input power connections at L1, L2, and L3 are connected and tight.
The input power protection is installed.
The motor power connection at U, V, and W are connected and tight.
The input, motor, and control wiring are run in separate conduit runs.
The control wiring is connected and tight.
NO tools or foreign objects (such as drill shavings) are in the drive.
NO alternative power source for the motor (such as a bypass connection) is connected - NO voltage is applied to the output of the drive.
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Installation
Input AC Power
• Circuit breakers feeding the VFDs are recommended to be thermal-magnetic and fast-acting. They should be sized based on the VFD amperage and according to
. Refer to the installation schematic for exact breaker sizing.
• Every VFD should receive power from its own breaker. If multiple VFDs are to be combined on the same breaker, each drive should have its own protection measure (fuses or miniature circuit breaker) downstream from the breaker.
• Input AC line wires should be routed in conduit from the breaker panel to the drives. AC input power to multiple VFDs can be run in a single conduit if needed. Do not combine input and output power cables in the same conduit.
• The VFD should be grounded on the terminal marked PE. A separate insulated ground wire must be provided to each VFD from the electrical panel. This will reduce the noise being radiated in other equipment.
ATTENTION: Do not connect incoming AC power to output terminals U, V, W. Severe damage to the drive will result. Input power must always be wired to the input L terminal connections (L1, L2, L3).
30
VFD Output Power
• Motor wires from each VFD to its respective motor MUST be routed in a separate steel conduit away from control wiring and incoming AC power wiring. This is to avoid noise and crosstalk between drives.
An insulated ground must be run from each VFD to its respective motor. Do not run different fan output power cables in the same conduit.
• VFD mounted in fan: The load reactor should be sized accordingly when the VFD is mounted in the fan.
208/230V - Load reactor is optional but recommended for 15 HP and above motors.
460/480V - Load reactor is optional but recommended for 7.5 HP and above motors.
575/600V - Load reactors are required for all HP motors.
• Do not install a contactor between the drive and the motor. Operating such a device while the drive is running can potentially cause damage to the power components of the drive.
• When a disconnect switch is installed between the drive and motor, the disconnect should only be operated when the drive is in a STOP state.
VFD Programming
Programming
1. The Drive should be programmed for the proper motor voltage. P107 is set to 0 (Low) if motor voltage is 120V AC, 208V AC or 400V AC. P107 is set to 1 (High) if the motor voltage is 230V AC, 480V AC, or
575V AC.
2. The Drive should be programmed for the proper motor overload value. P108 is calculated as Motor
FLA x 100 / Drive Output Rating (available in Table 12 on page 32
).
To enter the PROGRAM mode to access the parameters:
This will activate the password prompt (PASS).
2. Use the Up and Down buttons to scroll to the password value (the factory default password is “0225”) and press the Mode (M) button. Once the correct password is entered, the display will read “P100”, which indicates that the PROGRAM mode has been accessed at the beginning of the parameter menu.
3. Use the Up and Down buttons to scroll to the desired parameter number.
4. Once the desired parameter is found, press the Mode (M) button to display the present parameter setting. The parameter value will begin blinking, indicating that the present parameter setting is being displayed. The value of the parameter can be changed by using the Up and Down buttons.
5. Pressing the Mode (M) button will store the new setting and exit the PROGRAM mode. To change another parameter, press the Mode (M) button again to re-enter the PROGRAM mode. If the Mode button is pressed within 1 minute of exiting the PROGRAM mode, the password is not required to access the parameters. After one minute, the password must be re-entered to access the parameters again.
P500 parameter provides a history of the last 8 faults on the drive. It can be accessed without entering
PROGRAM mode.
Figure 21 - VFD Screen
AUTO
M
FWD
REV
R F
RUN
STOP
31
ACTECH SMV VFD
Table 12 - Cross-Reference
HP Part Number
20
25
30
40
50
60
0.5
ESV371N02YXB571
1 ESV751N02YXB571
1.5
ESV112N02YXB571
2 ESV152N02YXB571
3
5
ESV222N02YXB571
ESV402N02TXB571
7.5
ESV552N02TXB571
10
15
20
1
ESV752N02TXB571
ESV113N02TXB571
ESV153N02TXB571
ESV751N04TXB571
1.5
ESV112N04TXB571
2 ESV152N04TXB571
3
5
ESV222N04TXB571
ESV402N04TXB571
25
30
40
50
7.5
ESV552N04TXB571
10 ESV752N04TXB571
15
20
ESV113N04TXB571
ESV153N04TXB571
ESV183N04TXB571
ESV223N04TXB571
ESV303N04TXB571
ESV373N04TXB571
60
1
2
3
ESV453N04TXB571
ESV751N06TXB571
ESV152N06TXB571
ESV222N06TXB571
5 ESV402N06TXB571
7.5
ESV552N06TXB571
10
15
ESV752N06TXB571
ESV113N06TXB571
ESV153N06TXB571
ESV183N06TXB571
ESV223N06TXB571
ESV303N06TXB571
ESV373N06TXB571
ESV453N06TXB571
Volts
480V
600V
600V
600V
600V
600V
600V
600V
480V
480V
480V
480V
480V
480V
480V
480V
600V
600V
600V
600V
600V
600V
240V
240V
240V
480V
480V
480V
480V
480V
240V
240V
240V
240V
240V
240V
240V
HP Part Number Volts
0.5
ESV371N01SXB571 120/240V
1 ESV751N01SXB571 120/240V
1.5
ESV112N01SXB571 120/240V
1Ø
Input
X
X
X
3Ø
Input
-
-
-
Input Amps 1Ø
120V AC
9.2
16.6
20
Input Amps 1Ø
240V AC
4.6
8.3
10
Output
Amps
2.4
4.2
6
Breaker 1Ø
120V AC
15
25
30
Breaker 1Ø
240V AC
15
15
20
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1Ø
Input
X
X
X
X
X
- X
- X
X
X
3Ø
Input
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Input Amps 1Ø Input Amps 3Ø
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
5.1
8.8
12
13.3
17.1
-
-
6.8
10.2
12.4
19.7
87
2
3.2
4.4
38
45
59
74
12.4
15.8
24
31
25
31
36
47
59
71
3.6
4.1
5.4
9.3
33
48
59
2.5
2.9
5
6.9
8.1
10.8
18.6
26
Breaker 1Ø
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
15
15
20
25
30
-
-
Breaker 3Ø
15
20
20
30
150
15
15
15
70
80
100
125
20
25
40
50
40
50
60
70
90
110
15
15
15
15
50
80
90
15
20
30
40
15
15
15
15
6.1
9
11
17
77
1.7
2.7
3.9
34
40
52
65
11
14
21
27
22
27
32
41
52
62
3
3.5
4.8
8.2
29
42
54
2.1
Output
Amps
2.4
4.2
6
7
9.6
16.5
23
32
Make-up Air (MUA) Board Connectors
The Make-up Air Board ( Figure 22
) is located in the main cabinet, refer to Figure 23 for location.
Figure 22 - MUA Board
VR1 J20 J21
K7
C15
R209
R20
C10
C12 R8 R10 C13
C74
K2
J19
POWER
HOT
J17
K9
IN
COM
R58
K11
K12
COM
COM
24V
0-10
COM
COM
SLT
SLT
LLT
LLT
ICT
ICT
OCT
OCT
CDT
CDT
DT
DT
ST
ST
IT
IT
RT
RT
PS1
OT
OT
COM
COM
IN
COM
COM
COM
J39
R157
R183
C89
R155
R188
C88
C191
R213
R211
C147 R182
C9
C144
C145
C148
C149
+
VR2
R216
R214
C151
C152
R245
C16
R208 R16
C168
K8
R154
R189
C87 K10
C23 R24
C22 R26
C24 R22
K15
C52
C25 R18
K16 D29
D28
R76
Q5
C50
C49
MOD PWR
MOD OUTPUT
C29 R21
K4
C17
R205
C28
R12
R27
K6
C27 R25
C26 R23
F6
K23
K14
R158
C98
C166
R227
C161
U66
R163
R165
R166
R169
R179 R180
C39
C40
R199
C42
R202
C43
K22
C194
R197
C99
C195
C192
PROG
R201
C143
R200
R70
R71
C44
C106
R160
R159
R141
C76
R134
C78
C79
R140
R142
C80
Y2
C196
Y1
C119
1
C193
U71
C172
K24
R230 R229
C121
R54
U12
R47
C129
C174 R234
R233
C173 R232
R231
R237
R239
R243
R242
C176 R241
C175 R240
R236
C154 R220
C35
C34
C33
C32
U9
R224
C159
R222
C158
R226
C160
R223
R219
C155
C156
C157
C73
R195
R193
R128
R123
C70
C72
R194 R127
R191
R122
C69
C71
R192 R126
R190 R121
C68
D23
D22
C30
D25
R45
R44
R31
ISO1
R28 R79
C38
C36
R77
U11
R244
U2
U14
C18 R19
C21 R13
C19
R17
C20 R15
R178
C184
R156
C138
C139
C81
U17
C137
C136
U20
K13
C182
C141
C140
C101
C100
C97
C96
C135
C134
ON
DDC TERM
C94
C103
CASLink BMS SLAVE
C95
C104
U78
U18
K20
K21
C31
R42
R55
R53
R50
R49
K17
R95
R92
R89
R86
K18
K19
R112
R111
R110
PILOT
SPARK
D42
D41
D40
R109
R84
ALARM
D39
D34
R83
R82
BLOWR
BURN
D33
D32
R81
AUX
D31
1 J11 8 1
C82
R147
J16 8 1 J25 3
R153 R150
HMI VFD MASTER
W Y G BAS/STAT
R C
-
DDC
C
33
NOTE: Some connections may not be used dependent on system configurations
RJ45 connectors
Connector J1 and J2 are associated with BMS.
Connector J3 through J6 are interchangeable and may be used to connect to an HMI or VFD.
J1 - CASLink/Slave
J2 - CASLink/Slave
J3 - HMI/VFD/Master
J6
J4 - HMI/VFD/Master
J5 - HMI/VFD/Master
J6 - HMI/VFD/Master
J2
J5
J1
J4 J3
Connector J7 contains inputs and outputs for the
Flame Safety Controller (FSC)
9
18
1
10
Pin 1 - 24VAC Output to Pressure Switch Input
(PSW) on FSC or Electric Heater (option)
Pin 2 - 24VAC Output to Thermostat Input ï€
(TH/W) on FSC
Pin 3 - 24VAC Input from IND on FSC
Pin 4 - 24VAC Input from V1 on FSC
Pin 5 - 24VAC Output to Main Gas Valve
(Connected to J7-4)
Pin 6 - 0-10VDC + Analog Output to Modulating
Gas Valve
Pin 7 - 0-10VDC - Output to Modulating Gas Valve
Pin 8 - Modulating Gas Valve Shield
Pin 9 - 24VAC Common to Main/Pilot Gas Valve
Pin 10 - 24VAC Input from Vent Proving Switch ï€
(J7-1) / Electric Heat Dry Contact
Pin 11 - 24VAC Output (L1) on FS
Pin 12 - 24VAC Supply Power (R) on FSC
Pin 13 - 24VAC Out to High Limit Switch
Pin 14 - 24VAC Out to Vent Proving Switch
Pin 15 - Detects 24VAC Presence from Roll Out
Switch
Pin 16 - Detects 24VAC Presence from High Limit
Switch
Pin 17 - 24VAC Out to Roll Out Switch
Pin 18 - Valve Ground (V2) on FSC/High Efficiency
(HE) Furnace Relay (RE-B)
34
Connector J8 contains inputs and outputs for the
Flame Safety Controller (FSC)
9
18
1
10
Pin 1 - 24VAC Output to Pressure Switch Input
(PSW) on FSC or Electric Heater (option)
Pin 2 - 24VAC Output to Thermostat Input ï€
(TH/W) on FSC
Pin 3 - Detects 24VAC Presence from IND on FSC
Pin 4 - 24VAC Input from V1 on FSC
Pin 5 - 24VAC Output to Main Gas Valve
(Connected to J8-4)
Pin 6 - 0-10VDC + Analog Output to Modulating
Gas Valve
Pin 7 - 0-10VDC - Output to Modulating Gas Valve
Pin 8 - Modulating Gas Valve Shield
Pin 9 - 24VAC Common to Main/Pilot Gas Valve
Pin 10 - 24VAC Input from Vent Proving Switch ï€
(J8-1) / Electric Heat Dry Contact
Pin 11 - 24VAC Output (L1) on FSC
Pin 12 - 24VAC Supply Power (R) on FSC
Pin 13 - 24VAC Output to High Limit Switch
Pin 14 - 24VAC Output to Vent Proving Switch
Pin 15 - Detects 24VAC Presence from Roll Out
Switch
Pin 16 - Detects 24VAC Presence from High Limit
Switch
Pin 17 - 24VAC Output to Roll Out Switch
Pin 18 - Valve Ground (V2) on FSC/High Efficiency
(HE) Furnace Relay (RE-B)
Connector J9 contains 120V AC connections
1 8
Pin 1 - 120VAC Main Input
Pin 2 - N/A
Pin 3 - 120VAC Input from Fire Micro-Switch
Pin 4 - 120VAC Output to Intake/Discharge Damper
Actuator
Pin 5 - 120VAC Input from Intake Damper End
Switch
Pin 6 - 120VAC Output to Drain Heater
Pin 7 - 120VAC Output to Cabinet Heater
Pin 8 - 120VAC Neutral
8
Connector J10 contains 120V AC connections
Pin 1 - N/A
Pin 2 - N/A
Pin 3 - N/A
Pin 4 - 120VAC Output to Crankcase Heater
Pin 5 - N/A
Pin 6 - N/A
Pin 7 - N/A
Pin 8 - N/A
1
35
1 8
Connector J11 contains low voltage screw terminal connections
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 3
Pin 4
- 24VAC Auxiliary Input
- 24VAC Auxiliary Input
- 24VAC Auxiliary Input
- 24VAC Call for Heat Input
AUX IN2 AUX IN3 HEA COOL FA
W Y G BAS/STAT
Pin 5 - 24VAC Call for Cooling Input
Pin 6 - 24VAC Call for Blower Input
Pin 7 - 24VAC Occupied Override Input
Pin 8 - 24VAC Isolated Common
1 8
Connector J12 contains low voltage screw terminal connections
24V AC 24V AC
DI-1
24V AC
AI-1
Pin 1 - 24VAC Output to Smoke Detector
Pin 2 - 24VAC Output to Smoke Detector
Pin 3 - 24VAC Digital Input from Smoke Detector
Pin 4 - 24VAC Common to Smoke Detector
Pin 5 - 24VAC Output to Air Quality Sensor
Pin 6 - 0-10V Analog Input from Air Quality Sensor
Pin 7 - 24VAC Common to Air Quality Sensor
Pin 8 - 24VAC Common to Air Quality Sensor
Connector J13 contains low voltage connections
7
14
1
8
Pin 1 - N/A
Pin 2 - PWM + Output for Supply ECM
Pin 3 - 24VAC Output for Low Gas Pressure Switch
Pin 4 - 24VAC Output for High Gas Pressure Switch
Pin 5 - 24VAC Output for Clogged Filter Switch
Pin 6 - 24VAC Output for Low Airflow
Pin 7 - 24VAC Input for Board Power
Pin 8 - N/A
Pin 9 - N/A
Pin 10 - 24VAC Input from Low Gas Pressure
Switch
Pin 11 - 24VAC Input from High Gas Pressure
Switch
Pin 12 - 24VAC Input from Clogged Filter Switch
Pin 13 - 24VAC Input from Low Air Pressure Switch
Pin 14 - 24VAC for Board Power
36
1 8
Connector J14 contains screw terminal connections
Pin 1 - 24VAC Output to Intake RH
Pin 2 - 0-10VDC Analog Input from Intake RH
Pin 3 - 24VAC Common to Intake RH
Pin 4 - 24VAC Common to Humidity Sensor
24V DC
AI-2
24V DC
AI-3
Pin 5 - 24VAC Output to Space RH
Pin 6 - 0-10VDC Analog Input from Space RH
Pin 7 - 24VAC Common to Space RH
Pin 8 - 24VAC Common to Humidity Sensor
1 10
Connector J15 contains low voltage connections
Pin 1 - Intake Temperature Thermistor Input
Pin 2 - Intake Temperature Thermistor Input
Pin 3 - Return Temperature Thermistor Input
Pin 4 - Return Temperature Thermistor Input
Pin 5 - Outdoor Temperature Thermistor Input
Pin 6
Pin 7
Pin 8
Pin 9
Pin 10
THERMISTORS
- Outdoor Temperature Thermistor Input
- Discharge Temperature Thermistor Input
- Discharge Temperature Thermistor Input
- Space Temperature Thermistor Input
- Space Temperature Thermistor Input
1 8
Connector J16 contains low voltage screw terminal connections
BAS/STAT
R C
Pin 1 - 0-10VDC Analog Input
Pin 2 - 4-20 mA Analog Input
Pin 3 - 24VAC Common
Pin 4 - 24VAC Common
Pin 5
Pin 6
Pin 7
Pin 8
- 24VAC Unit Interlock Input
- 24VAC Output Stat tied to J12-7
- 24VAC Output (R) tied to J12-6
- 24VAC Common
NOTE: Connector J17 is grouped with connectors J-19 through J-21
37
Connector J18 contains low voltage connections
7
14
1
8
Pin 1 - 24VDC + Output for Spare
Pin 2 - 0-10VDC Analog Output for Mixing Box
Actuator
Pin 3 - 0-10VDC Analog Output for Bypass Damper/
Powered Exhaust
Pin 4 - 24VAC Output for DX Float Switch
Pin 5 - 24VAC Output for Door Interlock
Pin 6 - 24VAC Extreme Low Ambient Bypass
Solenoid Output
Pin 7 - 24VAC for Damper Actuator
Pin 8 - 24VDC - Common for Spare
Pin 9 - 0-10VDC Analog Output for Mixing Box
Actuator
Pin 10 - 0-10VDC Analog Output for Bypass
Damper/Powered Exhaust
Pin 11 - 24VAC Input from DX Float Switch
Pin 12 - 24VAC Input from Door Interlock
Pin 13 - 24VAC Extreme Low Ambient Bypass
Solenoid Common
Pin 14 - 24VAC for Damper Actuator
J20 J21
Connector J17 Output for Power Vent 1
Connector J19 Output for Power Vent 2
Connector J20 Neutral for Power Vent
Connector J21 Neutral for Power Vent
J19 J17
J17 - 120VAC Output for Power Vent 1
J19 - 120VAC Output for Power Vent 2
J20 - 120VAC Neutral for Power Vents
J21 - 120VAC Neutral for Power Vents
Connector J22 (Y1) N/A
Connector J23 (Y2) Reversing Valve
Connector J24 (Y3) N/A
2 1 J22
2 1
2 1
J23
J24
J22 Pin 1 - N/A
J22 Pin 2 - N/A
J23 Pin 1 - 24VAC Output to Reversing Valve 1
J23 Pin 2 - 24VAC Common to Reversing Valve 1
J24 Pin 1 - N/A
J24 Pin 2 - N/A
38
1
Connector J25 contains low voltage screw terminal connections for DDC Communications Isolated
Pin 1 RS-485 +
Pin 2 RS-485 -
+ -
DDC
C
Pin 3 RS-485 Common
3
Connector J26 Programming Port
1
2
USB
Connector J27 USB Programming Port
1 8
Connector J28 contains low voltage screw terminal connections
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 3
Pin 4
- 24VAC Output
- 24VAC Output
- 24VAC Digital Input
- 24VAC Common
24V AC 24V AC
DI-2
24V AC
AI-4
Pin 5 - 24VAC Output to Supply Fan
Pin 6 - 0-10VDC Analog Input Supply Fan Speed
Pin 7 - 24VAC Common to Supply Fan
Pin 8 - 24VAC Common to Supply Fan
1 8
Connector J29 contains 120V AC connections
N/A
39
Connector J30 contains 120V AC connections
Pin 1 through 7 - N/A
1
Pin 8 - 120VAC Alarm Output
8
Connector J31 contains inputs and outputs for components
9
18
1
10
Pin 1 - 24VDC + Output to Outdoor RH Sensor
Pin 2 - 0-10VDC Analog Input from Outdoor RH
Sensor
Pin 3 - 24VDC/0-10VDC Common from Outdoor RH
Sensor
Pin 4 - 24VDC + Output to Inlet Gas Pressure
Sensor
Pin 5 - 0-10VDC Analog Input from Inlet Gas
Pressure Sensor
Pin 6 - 24VDC/0-10VDC Common from Inlet Gas
Pressure Sensor
Pin 7 - 24VDC + Output to Discharge RH Sensor
Pin 8 - 0-10VDC Analog Input from Discharge RH
Sensor
Pin 9 - 24VDC/0-10VDC Common from Discharge
RH Sensor
Pin 10 - 24VDC + output to Return RH Sensor
Pin 11 - 0-10VDC Analog Input from Return RH
Sensor
Pin 12 - 24VDC/0-10VDC Common from Return RH
Sensor
Pin 13 - 24VDC + output to Clogged Filter Pressure
Sensor
Pin 14 - 0-10VDC Analog Input from Clogged Filter
Pressure Sensor
Pin 15 - 24VDC/0-10VDC Common from Clogged
Filter Pressure Sensor
Pin 16 - 24VDC + Output for Analog or Static
Pressure Control for Blower/Damper
Pin 17 - 0-10VDC Analog Input for Analog or Static
Pressure Control for Blower/Damper
Pin 18 - 24VDC/0-10VDC Common for Analog or
Static Pressure Control for Blower/Damper
40
Connector J32 contains inputs and outputs for components
9
18
1
10
Pin 1 - 24VAC Output for High Air Airflow Switch
Pin 2 - PWM + Output for Exhaust/Power Vent ECM
Pin 3 - 24VAC Output for Proof Of Closure / HE
Furnace Float Switch
Pin 4 - 24VDC + Output for Exhaust Current Sensor
Pin 5 - 24VAC Output To CO Alarm
Pin 6 - 0-24VDC + Analog Input from Flame Sensor
Pin 7 - 24VDC Powered PWM to Modulating Gas
Valve, Full Wave, 16 kHz
Pin 8 - 0-10VDC Analog Output
Pin 9 - 0-10VDC Analog Output for Electric Heat
Pin 10 - 24VAC Input from High Airflow Switch
Pin 11 - PWM - Output for Exhaust/Power Vent
ECM
Pin 12 - 24VAC Input from Proof of Closure / HE
Furnace Float Switch
Pin 13 - 4-20mA Input from Exhaust Current Sensor
Pin 14 - 24VAC From CO Alarm
Pin 15 - 24VDC Common From Flame Sensor
Pin 16 - 24VDC Powered PWM to Modulating Gas
Valve, Full Wave, 16 kHz
Pin 17 - 0-10VDC Analog Output
Pin 18 - 0-10VDC Analog Output for Electric heat
Connector J33 contains inputs and outputs for components
9
18
1
10
Pin 1 - 24VDC + Output for Main Unit Current
Sensor
Pin 2 - 24VDC + Output for Cooling Current Sensor
Pin 3 - PWM + Output for Condenser Fans 1
Pin 4 - PWM + Output for Condenser Fans 2
Pin 5 - PWM + Input for Spare 1
Pin 6 - 24VDC + Pulse Input from Gas Meter
Pin 7 - 24VDC + Pulse Input from Water Meter
Pin 8 - 24VAC Output to Oil Solenoid
Pin 9 - 0-10VDC Analog Input for CFM Monitor
Pin 10 - 4-20mA Input from Main Unit Current
Sensor
Pin 11 - 4-20mA Input from Cooling Current Sensor
Pin 12 - PWM - Output for Condenser Fans 1
Pin 13 - PWM - Output for Condenser Fans 2
Pin 14 - PWM - Input for Spare 1
Pin 15 - PWM - Pulse Input from Gas Meter
Pin 16 - 24VDC - Pulse Input from Water Meter
Pin 17 - 24VAC Common for Oil Solenoid
Pin 18 - 0-10VDC Common for CFM Monitor
Connector J34 Stepper Motor (EEV)
Pin 1 - Stepper Motor 1, 12V, Bipolar
Pin 2 - Stepper Motor 1, 12V, Bipolar
2 1
4 3
Pin 3 - Stepper Motor 1, 12V, Bipolar
Pin 4 - Stepper Motor 1, 12V, Bipolar
41
1 10
Connector J35 contains low voltage connections
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 5
- Suction Line Thermistor Input
- Suction Line Thermistor Input
- Liquid Line Thermistor Input
- Liquid Line Thermistor Input
- Evap/Indoor Thermistor Input
THERMISTORS
Pin 6 - Evap/Indoor Thermistor Input
Pin 7 - Condenser/Outdoor Coil Thermistor Input
Pin 8 - Condenser/Outdoor Coil Thermistor Input
Pin 9 - Compressor Discharge Thermistor Input
Pin 10 - Compressor Discharge Thermistor Input
Connector J36 contains inputs and outputs for components
9
18
1
10
Pin 1 - 24VAC Output for Low Pressure Switch
Pin 2 - 24VAC Input for Low Pressure Switch
Pin 3 - 24VAC Output for High Pressure Switch
Pin 4 - 24VAC Input for Low Pressure Switch
Pin 5 - 24VAC Output for High Temp Switch
Pin 6 - 24VAC Input for Low Pressure Switch
Pin 7 - 24VAC Output to Oil Sensor
Pin 8 - 24VAC Common from Oil Sensor
Pin 9 - 24VAC Input from Oil Sensor
Pin 10 - 24VDC + output to Liquid Line Pressure
Transducer
Pin 11 - 0-10VDC Analog Input from Liquid Line
Pressure Transducer
Pin 12 - 24VDC/0-10VDC Common from Liquid Line
Pressure Transducer
Pin 13 - PWM - 24VDC + Output to Suction Line
Pressure Transducer
Pin 14 - PWM - 0-10VDC Analog Input from Suction
Line Pressure Transducer
Pin 15 - PWM - 24VDC/0-10VDC Common from
Suction Line Pressure Transducer
Pin 16 - 24VDC - 24VDC + output to Discharge Line
Pressure Transducer
Pin 17 - 0-10VDC Analog Input from Discharge Line
Pressure Transducer
Pin 18 - 24VDC/0-10VDC Common from Discharge
Line Pressure Transducer
Connector J37 Stepper Motor (Reheat Valve)
Pin 1 - Stepper Motor 2, 12V, Bipolar
Pin 2 - Stepper Motor 2, 12V, Bipolar
2 1
4 3
Pin 3 - Stepper Motor 2, 12V, Bipolar
Pin 4 - Stepper Motor 2, 12V, Bipolar
42
Connector J38 Modbus
MODBUS
C B A
3
Pin 3 (C) Modbus Ground
1
Pin 1 (A) Modbus (-)
Pin 2 (B) Modbus (+)
ON
Dip Switch S1
1 2 3 4
Switch 1, 2, 3 always OFF. Switch 4 Always ON. If Switch 4 is OFF, BAS terminals disabled.
Dip Switch S2
Programming - Service Only
Dip Switch S3
End of line termination
Dip Switch S4
Programming - Service Only
ON
43
Optional Components
AC Interlock
On units equipped with the optional AC interlock, 24V AC power from a rooftop unit should be field wired to screw terminal J11-(5) on the MUA board. 24V AC common from a rooftop unit should be field wired to terminal block J11-(8) on the MUA board. When these terminals are powered, heat will be locked out on the RTU.
Burner Interlock
On units equipped with the optional burner interlock, 24V AC power from a rooftop unit should be field wired to screw terminal J11-(4) on the MUA board. 24V AC common from a rooftop unit should be field wired to terminal block J11-(8) on the MUA board. When these terminals are powered, cooling will be locked out on the RTU.
Electric Cabinet Heater
Units can be shipped with an optional 120V electric cabinet heater powered from the MUA board. There is a temperature sensor built onto the MUA board that will regulate when the cabinet heater activates.
Component Location
Use
through
for component locations. Units equipped with ERV, refer to
Recovery (Optional)” on page 90
for component descriptions and locations.
Figure 23 - Typical Main Cabinet
1 2 3
4
5
6
7
8
16
14
15
13
11
12
10
9
17 18 19 20
44
21
1.
Differential Pressure Transducer – Monitors the air pressure differential between two points. This transducer is used in different air control options.
2.
40VA 120V to 24V Transformer (TR-xx) – Verify transformers on schematics. Will vary by application.
3.
20VA 120V to 24V Transformer (TR-xx) – Verify transformers on schematics. Will vary by application.
4.
Convenience Outlet Circuit Breaker (CB-02) – Protects transformer for convenience outlet from high current spikes.
5.
Circuit Breaker (CB-01) – Protects electrical components from high current spikes.
6.
Terminal Strip – Central location to terminate control wiring. Should be used for troubleshooting.
7.
24V DC Power Supply (PWS-01) – Converts input voltage of 100-240V AC to an output voltage of
24V DC .
8.
RJ45 Converter – Communication port for a Cat 5 cable that allows components to connect to other components.
9.
Induced Draft Air Sensor (PS-01) – A safety device located near the draft inducer motor that will prevent operation of the furnace if correct venting air pressures are not detected.
10.
MUA Board - Controls the 0-10V DC signal to modulating furnace controls, modulating gas valve, and
24V AC signals to staged furnace controls.
11.
Flame Safety Control (FSC-01) – Initiates and monitors flame. Equipped with non-adjustable time settings for pre-purge, inter-purge, and post-purge of the exhaust flue and control cabinet.
12.
750V 230/460V to 120V Transformer – Used for the convenience outlet. Voltage inputs 208/230/480.
13.
Clogged Filter Switch (PS-10) – Senses whether the filters at the intake to the main supply motor are free of dirt and contaminant. This is an optional component.
14.
VFD Controller (VFD-01) – Used to protect supply motor, and to control the speed of the motor to vary airflow across unit.
15.
Distribution Block – Distributes power to condensing components.
16.
Disconnect Switch (SW-01) – Controls all electrical power to the entire unit.
17.
Compressor Drive Frequency Converter (VFD-02) – Operates the compressor.
18.
Compressor Local Control Panel (LCP) – Used to navigate the compressor’s VFD controls.
19.
HMI Panel – MUA board interface. The 4 buttons are used to navigate through the menu screens.
20.
Convenience Outlet Transformer (TR-09) – 2000VA transformer used for the convenience outlet.
Voltage inputs 208/230/480.
21.
Door Switches (DS-xx) – These switches operate the LED lights inside the cabinet.
45
1
Figure 24 - Typical Refrigerant Access Panel Heat Pump with Reheat shown
13
14
8
2
7
9
6
5
4
10
12
11
3
15
16
Discharge
Line
46
1.
Refrigerant Low Pressure Switch (SW-15) – Detects refrigerant pressure on the low-pressure side of the system. If the pressure drops below the preset value, the compressor will shut down. This sensor has an automatic reset.
2.
Suction (Low) Line Pressure Sensor (PS-21) – Pressure transducer that monitors the low side of the refrigeration system.
3.
Filter/Drier – Absorbs water and filters system contaminants.
4.
Reversing Valve (RV-01) – A valve used for heat pump applications that changes the flow of refrigerant. By changing the flow of refrigerant, the heat pump cycle is changed from cooling to heating or heating to cooling.
5.
Hot Gas Reheat Valve(s) – Valve(s) will modulate the supply of refrigerant to the outdoor
(condensing) coil and to the reheat coil. Units with a single reheat valve, HG-01, will be a three-way valve. Units that use dual reheat valves, not shown, will have HG-01 in-line to the reheat coil inlet and
HG-02 in-line to the outdoor (condensing) coil inlet.
6.
Discharge Check Valve – Restricts liquid migration back to compressor during off cycles.
7.
Refrigerant High Pressure Switch (SW-16) – If the pressure rises above the preset value, the compressor will shut down.
8.
Discharge (High) Pressure Transducer (PS-22) – Pressure transducer that monitors the high side of the refrigeration system.
9.
Reheat Coil Check Valve – Restricts refrigerant flow to the reheat coil when reheat is not active.
10.
Compressor Power Termination – Power connection from Compressor Drive Frequency Converter.
11.
Oil Return Solenoid Valve (OS-01) – Allows oil to be distributed throughout the scroll set when activated. Not applicable to VZH-044/065 compressors.
12.
Oil Level Sensor (SEN-01) – Monitors the oil level in the compressor. If the oil level is low, the unit will shut down.
13.
Crankcase Heater (HE-03) – A heating cable used to boil off liquid refrigerant within the crank of the compressor.
14.
Compressor – Circulates refrigerant throughout the system.
15.
Liquid Line Pressure Sensor (PS-20) – Pressure transducer that monitors the liquid line pressure in the refrigeration system.
16.
Refrigerant High Temperature Switch (SW-18) – This safety switch opens at dangerously high compressor discharge temperatures. For heat pump applications only.
Not Shown :
• High-Pressure Port – High-pressure gauge connection port.
• Low-Pressure Port – Low-pressure gauge connection port.
• Accumulator – The accumulator prevents liquid flood back to the compressor. Used in heat pump and certain cooling applications.
47
9
9
8
7
Figure 25 - Gas Furnace Cabinet
Typical Standard Gas Furnace
1
2
4
3
6
5
High Turndown Furnace Option
7
8
6 5
1
2
4
3 6 5 3
1.
Furnace Power Vent (PV-xx) – An assembly used to exhaust flue gases.
2.
High-Pressure Gas Switch (PS-03) – Monitors pressure and shuts down heating when pressures rise above the desired set point. This is an optional component.
3.
Manifold Gas Pressure Gauge (0-10” wc) – Measures manifold gas pressure.
4.
Manual Gas Shut Off Valve – Allows gas flow to burner. Shut off to leak test gas train.
5.
Modulating Gas Valve (VA-03) – Controls the amount of gas to the furnace to meet desired discharge/space temperature.
6.
ON/OFF Gas Valve (VA-01) – On/Off gas valve with built-in regulator and manual shut off switch.
7.
Low-Pressure Gas Switch (PS-04) – Monitors pressure and shuts down heating when pressure drops below the desired set point. This is an optional component.
8.
Inlet Gas Pressure Gauge ( 0-35” wc) – Measure inlet gas pressure.
9. For standard furnaces, a stainless steel type B vent will be used. For High Efficiency (HE) furnace, a
PVC vent will be used. See “Furnace Condensation Drain” on page 17
.
48
1
2
Figure 26 - Typical Burner Cabinet
Single Burner
3 4
5
1
2
4
3
Split Burner
1
4
6
5
7B
7A
1.
Ignitor – Powered by Flame Safety Control to initiate light-off.
2.
Rollout Switch 1 (SW-05) – Normally closed temperature activated switch. Mounted on bracket at the firing tube. Senses flame roll-out in the event of a blocked tube, low airflow, or low gas pressure. If flame-rollout is present, the switch de-energizes heater circuit on the furnace. Must be manually reset by pressing the small button on top of the switch.
3.
Furnace High Temperature Switch (SW-04) – Normally closed switch. De-energizes the heater circuit on the furnace if temperature exceeds mechanical set-point. Automatic recycling.
4.
Flame Rod (FR-01) – Continuously senses for the presence of flame in heating mode after ignition has commenced. This sensor is wired to the Flame Safety Control (FSC-1).
5.
Rollout Switch 2 (SW-13) – Normally closed temperature activated switch. Mounted on bracket at the firing tube. Senses flame roll-out in the event of a blocked tube, low airflow, or low gas pressure. If flame-rollout is present, the switch de-energizes heater circuit on the furnace. Must be manually reset by pressing the small button on top of the switch.
6. Single Burner Assembly – Capacity varies by unit size.
7. Split Furnace Assembly – Capacity varies by unit size. When the high turndown option is selected, a split furnace will be present.
A. First Stage – Smallest of the two stages. The first stage can modulate for the highest turndown.
B. Second Stage – When first stage is 100% operational, the second stage can modulate to meet the required heating capacity.
49
Figure 27 - Typical Damper Access Panel
2 3
1
1.
Return Temperature and/or Humidity Sensor (SN-xx) – Monitors the return air temperature and/or humidity.
2.
Outdoor Temperature Sensor (SN-xx) – Monitors the outdoor temperature. Located behind outside air intake louvers.
3.
Intake Damper Assembly Motor (MT-xx) – Provides control of the outside/return air damper assembly .
Figure 28 - Typical Blower and Air Intake Access Doors/Panel
1
6 4
2
5
7
3
1.
Condensing Fan Motor (MT-xx) – Pulls air across the outdoor coil.
2.
Supply Motor (MT-01) – Located behind door. Main supply air motor.
3.
Discharge Temperature Sensor or Discharge Humidity/Temperature (SN-xx) – Monitors discharge air temperature or humidity/temperature.
4.
Door Tamper Switch (SW-19) – When the blower door is open, the switch will de-activate the supply motor.
5.
Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV-1) – Controls the flow of refrigerant to maintain a desired superheat value.
6.
Intake Temperature or Intake Humidity/Temperature Sensor (SN-xx/HUM-xx) – Monitors intake air humidity/temperature.
7.
Float Switch (SW-xx) – Monitors the water level from condensation in the drain pan.
Not Shown: Evap Coil Temperature Sensor (SN-xx) – Monitors the dew point temperature of the air before the reheat coil.
50
Electric Heater Option
The electric coils on the heater are controlled using Silicon Controller Rectifier (SCR) controls. SCR is a time proportioning type controller that modulates the heater and supplies the exact amount of power to match the heat demand.
The three black wires from the electric heater will need to be field wired to the disconnect switch.
Figure 29 - Electric Heater Option
2 3
1
4
9
8
6
5
7
1.
Terminal Strip – Central location to terminate control wiring. Should be used for troubleshooting.
2.
Stage Controller – Controls multiple heating stages in a pre-determined sequence. Works in conjunction with a proportional thermostat (not shown). A sensor is mounted in the blower housing for discharge control. The set-point is mounted remotely for either space control or discharge control.
3.
Stage Fuses - Protect the total load and/or individual heater stages.
4.
Mercury Contactor – Provides power to the individual stages of the heater (optional for quieter operation).
5.
Coil Contactor - Energizes coil when there is a signal from step controller.
6.
Magnetic Contactor - Provides power to the individual stages of the heater.
7.
Transformer - Supplies power to the control circuit. Supplied with a fuse.
8.
Solid State Relay (SSR) - Proportionally controls the amount of power transmitted to the heating elements.
9.
Disconnect Switch – Interrupts power to the electric coil.
51
Compressor Information
Oil return management – Insufficient lubrication can be the result of oil depositing itself in pipes and bends. Return management helps oil deposits to return to the crankcase by:
• Increasing velocity for short periods at regular time intervals.
• Providing adequate oil return when velocity is too low.
Figure 30 - Sight Glass
Timed oil boost – Returns oil from the system to the compressor for a defined time period. To set the oil boost configuration, go to Factory
Settings > Compressor Config > Oil Boost Time . The user can set the time OFF or configure a time setting between 1-120 minutes. Default is set to 60 minutes. When the system is in an oil boost, the boost will last for 1 minute, and an “O” will be displayed on the HMI.
Oil level –When the compressor is running and in a stabilized condition, the oil level should be visible in the sight glass window, see
.
The presence of small bubbles and foam indicates there could be a large concentration of refrigerant in the oil, or there may be liquid returning to the compressor.
Sight Glass
VZH 044/035/028
When the system has been running low on oil at a low RPM, less than 3000 RPM (100 Hz) for 19 minutes, the internal lubrication algorithm in the drive will accelerate the compressor. The compressor will accelerate to 4200 RPM (140 Hz) for 60 seconds. This will make sure there is sufficient lubrication of the compressor’s moving parts.
When “Hands On” mode is selected, the oil return management will not be active, even if the parameter is set to be on. If the compressor does run below 3000 RPM (100 Hz) for 19 minutes, an error will occur, and the compressor will shut down. The minimum/maximum speed for the compressor is 1500 RPM (50 Hz)/6000 RPM (200Hz).
Oil level sensor – This sensor is an optical sensor that monitors the compressor’s internal oil level. The sensor will send a signal to the VFD controller. A warning will be displayed on the HMI if a low oil level condition exists. If the oil level is low, the system will enter a secondary oil boost. If the oil level is still low after this boost cycle, the system will shut down and display a fault.
If the oil level is low, add oil as necessary when the compressor is idle. Use PVE oil from new containers.
DO NOT CONTAMINATE THE OIL . Connect an oil hand pump to the Schrader valve connection on the compressor. Add oil until the level fills 50-75% of the sight glass after the unit has been off for at least 5 minutes.
Compressor VZH 065
When the system has been running low on oil at a low RPM, less than 2400 RPM (80 Hz) for 19 minutes, the internal lubrication algorithm in the drive will accelerate the compressor. The compressor will accelerate to 3600 RPM (120 Hz) for 60 seconds. This will make sure there is sufficient lubrication of the compressor’s moving parts. When “Hands On” mode is selected, the oil return management will not be active, even if the parameter is set to be on. If the compressor does run below 2400 RPM (80 Hz) for 120 minutes, an error will occur, and the compressor will shut down. The minimum/maximum speed for the compressor is 1000 RPM (50Hz)/6600 RPM (330Hz).
If the oil level is low, add oil as necessary when the compressor is idle. Use PVE oil from new containers.
DO NOT CONTAMINATE THE OIL . Connect an oil hand pump to the Schrader valve connection on the compressor. Add oil until the level fills 50-75% of the sight glass after the unit has been off for at least 5 minutes.
52
Compressor VZH 088/117/170
When oil return management is enabled, the frequency converter performs an oil boost when the compressor is below 3000 RPM (100 Hz). The oil boost will happen every 60 minutes for 30 seconds when the compressor speed is below 3000 RPM (100 Hz). When “Hands On” mode is selected, the oil return management will not be active, even if the parameter is set to be on. The minimum/maximum speed for the compressor is 1500 RPM (50 Hz)/6000 RPM (200Hz).
Oil boost – This function is controlled by the Variable Frequency Drive converter (VFD-02) to return oil from the system to the compressor when oil balance cannot be reached or maintained in a defined time period.
Oil solenoid – The MUA board
controls the oil solenoid ( Figure 31
), which will then actuate the valve. This solenoid valve set up helps optimize the oil circulation and improves efficiency of the compressor at all running speeds. Control parameters are factory preset but are accessible on the parameter list as readonly values.
Oil level sensor
– This sensor ( Figure 31 ) is an optical sensor that monitors the compressor’s internal oil
level. The sensor will send a signal to the VFD controller. A warning will be displayed on the HMI if a low oil level condition exists. If the oil level is low, the system will enter a secondary oil boost. If the oil level is still low after this boost cycle, the system will shut down and display a fault.
If the oil level is low, add oil as necessary when the compressor is idle. Use POE oil from new containers.
DO NOT CONTAMINATE THE OIL.
Connect an oil hand pump to the Schrader valve connection on the compressor. Carefully add oil until the oil level sensor is satisfied after the compressor has been off for at least 5 minutes. Repeat until the oil level sensor is satisfied for at least 30 minutes of unit operation.
Figure 31 - Oil Level Sensor and Solenoid
Oil Level
Sensor
Oil
Solenoid
53
Compressor Drive Information
Refer to
for CDS 803 controller interface. Refer to Figure 33
for CDS302/303 controller interface.
CDS803 Quick Menu Navigation
The parameter setting for the compressor drive is factory set and should not be adjusted unless specified by a service representative. If replacing the compressor drive, verify the settings match the compressor drive parameter settings. If settings need to be programmed, proceed with the following:
• Press “Menu” to enter the “Quick Menu.”
• Press [ â–¼ ] to select “Compressor Function.”
• Press “OK” to enter parameter screen.
• Press “OK” to enter and edit the parameter. Use [ â–² ] [ â–¼ ] to adjust the parameter to the factory settings.
Press “OK” to set parameter.
• Use the VFD schematics to locate the parameters that will need to be adjusted.
CDS803 Main Menu Navigation
“Main Menu” is used for access to and programming of all parameters. The Main Menu parameters can be accessed readily by using the password. See VFD schematic for password.
For most Compressor Drive applications, it is not necessary to access the Main Menu parameters, but instead, the Quick Menu provides the simplest and quickest access to the typical required parameters.
The Main Menu accesses all parameters.
• Press [Menu] until indicator in display is placed above “Main Menu.”
• Press [ â–² ] [ â–¼ ] to browse through the parameter groups.
• Press “OK” to select a parameter group.
• Press [ â–² ] [ â–¼ ] to browse through the parameters in the specific group.
• Press “OK” to select the parameter.
• Press [ â–² ] [ â–¼ ] to set/change the parameter value.
Press “Back” to go back one level.
NOTE: Contact Factory Service Department if more information is needed.
Figure 32 - CDS 803 Interface Controller
54
CDS302/303 Quick Menu navigation
The parameter setting for the compressor drive is factory set and should not be adjusted unless specified by a service representative. If replacing the compressor drive, verify the settings match the compressor drive parameter settings. If settings need to be programmed, proceed with the following:
• Press ‘Quick Menus.’
• Press the down arrow to select ‘Compressor Functions.’
• Press ‘OK’ to enter the parameter screen.
• Use the arrow keypad to select parameters. Press ‘OK’ to enter the parameter screen.
• Press ‘OK’ to enter and edit the parameter. Use the arrows keypad to adjust the parameter to the factory settings. Press ‘OK’ to set parameter.
• Use the VFD schematics to locate the parameters that will need to be adjusted.
CDS302/303 Main Menu
In the Main menu mode, the parameters are divided into groups. Use the navigation keys for selecting a parameter group.
After selecting a parameter group, select a parameter with the navigation keys. The middle section on the display shows the parameter number and name.
The procedure for changing data is the same in both the Quick menu and the Main menu mode.
Press “OK” to change the selected parameter. The procedure for changing data depends on whether the selected parameter represents a numerical data value or a text value.
Some of the parameters cannot be changed from the LCP. These parameters are defined by the compressor choice made in 1-13 Compressor Selection. The parameters come up as “Read-only.”
NOTE: Contact Factory Service Department if more information is needed.
Figure 33 - CDS 302/303 Interface Controller
55
OPERATION
HMI Configuration Menu Access
Figure 34 - HMI Screen
General Overview
The HMI allows the user to change parameters and options. The user may use the HMI to view operating information regarding sensors, temperatures, pressures, and fault history on the HMI screen ï€
(
There are four buttons to navigate through the HMI screens.
OCCUPIED
SPACE
70°F
IDLE
NOTE: Buttons change functions during certain options and tests. Verify the screen and buttons throughout the menu display.
Figure 35 - Save Screen
User may access the HMI configuration screen by pressing the top two buttons simultaneously. To exit this screen, simply press the ‘BACK’ button. When setting certain options or functions, pressing the ‘BACK’ button multiple times will bring up the save screen (
user may select ‘YES’ to save changes, select ‘NO’ to return to factory settings or select ‘CANCEL.’ When selecting ‘CANCEL,’ any changes made will not be saved, and the screen will return to top menu.
UP
SAVE CHANGES?
CONFIRM YES
DOWN
BACK
ENTER
The HMI menu system allows full access to every configurable parameter in the HMI. The parameters are factory configured to the specific application. Parameters may need to be modified to fine-tune automatic operation after the original setup. Refer to
“Menu Descriptions” on page 59
through
.
User settings – Allows the user to change or set certain temperatures and configurations on the unit. Any changes within this menu do not require a reboot to take effect.
Factory settings – Requires a password to enter this menu (1111). These will be set job-specific from the plant. Upon exiting factory settings, if certain settings are altered, the board will reboot itself.
Service settings – Requires a password to enter this menu (1234). This will allow a certified technician to monitor the unit and test components in the system.
About - Unit type and software revision information.
Remote (HMI) Control Panel
On units shipped with a space HMI, a Cat 5 cable will need to be run from J4, J5, or J6 (refer to schematics) on the main MUA Board to J2 on the HMI. If additional space HMIs have been added, they can be daisy-chained from the first HMI. If there is a slave MUA board, HMIs can also be powered from J1 or J2 of the slave board. An end of line resistor should be added to the last HMI in the chain.
HMI Notification Letters
Figure 36 - Notification Letters
The HMI will display notification letters (
Figure 36 ) when the unit is in a
specific status.
• B = Blower Start or Blower Stop Delay Active
• C = Compressor Min On or Min Off Timer Active. Displayed when the unit loses a call for cooling or heating (heat pump) during the compressor’s “Min ON” or “Min OFF” time.
• E = Economizer Function
• O = Compressor oil boost
• T = Throttle Mode Active
• D = Dehumidification mode. Displayed when in dehumidification.
• Δ = Dynamic SP applied
B
OFF
01/01
FRI
B
OFF
HEAT
TEMP +
09:49
AM
SPACE
70°F
TEMP -
Notification
Letter Location
56
Configuring HMI
To enter the configuration menu (
), press the bottom two buttons simultaneously on the HMI faceplate. In this menu screen, you may adjust Communication and Advanced Options, check Status, and
About information.
Figure 37 - Configuration Menu
UP MENU
Configuration
Communication
Advanced Options
Status
DOWN ENTER
Communication
Under the communication menu, the user may adjust the following settings:
• Modbus Address - Default is 55 for the first HMI. For every additional HMI, increase the address by one. For example, if a second HMI is used, the Modbus Address should be 56. For a third HMI, the
Modbus Address should be 57.
• Baud - The baud rate address is 115200.
• Parity - Do not adjust this setting. The default setting should always be set to ‘EVEN.’
Advanced Options
Under advanced options, the user may adjust the following settings:
• Contrast - The user may adjust the setting from 0 to 10. Setting the contrast to 0 is the lowest setting available, and 10 is the highest contrast setting available. The factory default contrast setting is 5.
• Audio Enable - User may set the audio to off.
• Dimming Enable - Default is set to Off. If set to On, the ‘HMI Dimming Timer’ option will be available.
• Set Time - The user may adjust dimming setting from 10-60 seconds. The default time is 30 seconds.
Status
User may monitor board temperature status, Uptime (how long the board has been active since last restart), HW RH (HMI hardware humidity sensor), HW Temp (HMI hardware temperature sensor).
About
User may view SCADA Board Software Version, Modbus Address (assigned to HMI), Baud (115200).
57
Scheduling
To set a schedule on the HMI (
Figure 38 ), you must first enable scheduling:
Factory Settings >
Occupied Scheduling > On
Set your sensor temperature set points for occupied and unoccupied schedules: User Settings > Temp
Set Points > (Varies)
Once scheduling is enabled, and the temperature set points are configured, you may enter your scheduled days and times: User Settings > Scheduling
Schedule A Default
• Monday - Friday ï€
8:00AM to 6:00PM
• Saturday and Sunday ï€
Unocc
Schedule B Default
• Monday - Friday ï€
Unocc
• Saturday and Sunday ï€
Unocc
Figure 38 - Scheduling Screen
Schedule C Default
• Monday - Friday ï€
Unocc
• Saturday and Sunday ï€
Unocc
UP BACK
A
B
OCCUPIED SCHEDULING
MONDAY
8:00AM TO 6:00PM
6:00PM TO 6:00PM
DOWN ENTER
To adjust the settings, highlight the parameter and press ENTER .
• The first parameter to be highlighted will be the day. Press UP or DOWN to select the day an occupied time schedule is required.
• Press ENTER to continue to set a start time. Press UP or DOWN to set start time.
• Press ENTER to set an end time. Press UP or DOWN to set end time.
The system will run between these days, time, and desired temperature settings. When in the
UNOCCUPIED setting, the system will run at the unoccupied temperature setting.
Fan Speed and Damper Position Presets
outlines the aux pins on Connector J11 for preset settings associated with fan speed and damper position found in Factory Settings > Unit Options .
NOTE: When dehumidification is enabled (Aux 1), fan or damper preset speeds will not work.
Table 13 - Aux Presets
Presets
Normal Operation (Selected Blower Mode)
Fan Speed/Damper Position 1
Fan Speed/Damper Position 2
Fan Speed/Damper Position 3
Fan Speed/Damper Position 4
Fan Speed/Damper Position 5
Fan Speed/Damper Position 6
Fan Speed/Damper Position 7
Aux 1
X
X
X
X
Aux 2
X
X
X
X
Aux 3
X
X
X
X
58
Menu Descriptions
USER SETTINGS
Temp Set Points
– Different Set Points (SP) may not be available based on settings. If scheduling is enabled, there each SP. The user will be allowed to check or adjust:
•
Intake Set Points
– Adjustable SP for intake activation.
• Heat – “Activate Based On” must be set to Intake,
Both, Either, or Stat. Heating Type must be set to a heating configuration.
•
Cool
– “Activate Based On” must be set to Intake,
Both, Either, or Stat.
•
Discharge Set Points
– User adjustable SP for heat and cool discharge activation.
•
Heat
– Tempering mode must be set to discharge.
Heating Type must be set to a heating configuration.
•
Cool
– Tempering mode must be set to discharge.
•
Space Set Points
- User adjustable SP for heat and cool space activation.
• Heat – “Activate Based On” must be set to Space,
Both, or Either. Heating Type must be set to a heating configuration
•
Cool
– “Activate Based On” must be set to Space,
Both, Either, or Stat.
•
Discharge Limits
- Adjustable SP for discharge limits.
•
Min
– Cannot be greater than maximum discharge heat/cool SP.
•
Max
– Cannot be less than minimum discharge heat/ cool SP.
•
Humidity Ctrl
– Adjustable settings dependent on
“Reheat Mode” selection.
• RH Set Points – Relative Humidity SP
•
Intake
– Relative humidity intake SP for reheat activation.
•
Dschrg
– Relative humidity discharge SP for reheat activation.
•
Space
– Relative humidity space SP for reheat activation.
•
DP Set Points
– Dew Point SP
•
Intake
– Dew point intake SP for reheat activation.
•
Dschrg
– Dew point discharge SP for reheat activation.
•
Space
– Dew point space SP for reheat activation.
• Vapor PS Set Points – Vapor Pressure SP
•
Intake
– Vapor pressure intake SP for reheat activation.
•
Dschrg
– Vapor pressure discharge SP for reheat activation.
•
Space
– Vapor pressure space SP for reheat activation.
USER SETTINGS
TEMP SET POINTS
INTAKE SET POINTS
HEAT (OCC/UNOCC)
COOL (OCC/UNOCC)
DISCHARGE SET POINTS
HEAT (OCC/UNOCC)
COOL (OCC/UNOCC)
RANGE: 0-110°F/(-18)-43°C
DEFAULT: 45°F/7°C
RANGE: 40-120°F/4-49°C
DEFAULT: 75°F/24°C
RANGE: 30-150°F/4-66°C
DEFAULT: 80°F/27°C
RANGE: 30-120°F/4-26°C
DEFAULT: 55°F/13 °C
SPACE SET POINTS
HEAT (OCC/UNOCC)
COOL (OCC/UNOCC)
DISCHARGE LIMITS
HEAT MIN (OCC/UNOCC)
RANGE: 35-110°F/2-43°C
DEFAULT: 70°F/21°C
RANGE: 55-120°F/10-32°C
DEFAULT: 74°F/23°C
HEAT MAX (OCC/UNOCC)
COOL MIN (OCC/UNOCC)
RANGE: 40-150°F/4-66°C
DEFAULT: 80°F/26°C
RANGE: 40-150°F/4-66°C
DEFAULT: 100°F/37°C
RANGE: 40-80°F/4-26°C
DEFAULT: 55°F/13°C
RANGE: 40-80°F/4-26°C
DEFAULT: 70°F/20°C
COOL MAX (OCC/UNOCC)
HUMIDITY CTRL
RH SET POINTS
INTAKE (OCC/UNOCC)
DSCHRG (OCC/UNOCC)
SPACE (OCC/UNOCC)
RANGE: 0-100%
DEFAULT: 50%
RANGE: 0-100%
DEFAULT: 50%
RANGE: 0-100%
DEFAULT: 60%
DP SET POINTS
INTAKE (OCC/UNOCC)
DSCHRG (OCC/UNOCC)
RANGE: 38-75°F/2-24°C
DEFAULT: 55°F/13°C
RANGE: 38-75°F/2-24°C
DEFAULT: 55°F/13°C
RANGE: 38-75°F/2-24°C
DEFAULT: 55°F/13°C
SPACE (OCC/UNOCC)
VAPOR PS SET POINTS
INTAKE (OCC/UNOCC)
DSCHRG (OCC/UNOCC)
SPACE (OCC/UNOCC)
RANGE: 0.7-4.4 KPA
DEFAULT: 2.4 KPA
RANGE: MIN RH-4.4 KPA
DEFAULT: 2.4 KPA
RANGE: MIN RH-4.4 KPA
DEFAULT: 2.4 KPA
59
• Option Set Points - Adjustable Set Points (SP) for options that are enabled to “ON” in Factory Settings.
•
Room Override
– If set to On, the unit will use the
Room Override SP rather than Discharge SP. This setting will only have an effect when the heat tempering mode is set to Discharge and “Activate
Based On” is not set to “Intake” only. To enable On/
Off, go to
Factory Settings > Unit Options > Room
Override .
NOTE: The following options must be enabled On.
Factory Settings > Unit Options > Monitoring Sensors.
•
Firestat Set Points
- Adjustable activations SP.
• Intake/Discharge – If the sensor goes above SP, the unit will shut down. Reset on HMI.
• Freezestat Set Points – Adjustable activation SP.
•
Intake/Discharge
– If the sensor drops below SP, the unit will shut down. Reset on HMI.
•
Cabinet Heat
– If equipped, cabinet heater will activate when the temperature drops below SP.
•
Drain Heat
– If equipped, drain heater will activate if temperature is at the SP.
•
Overheat Set Point
– When in cooling mode, if the discharge temperature exceeds SP, the blower/unit will shut down.
• Economizer Settings – Activation SP for economizer.
Factory Settings > Unit Options > Outdoor Air
Config > Economizer Config > Economizer Mode
.
•
Temp Settings
• Economizer Temp – When OA drops below
“Economizer Temp,” economizer will activate.
•
Economizer Temp Band
– Damper’s opening position will be based on “Economizer Temp” SP minus the “Temp Band.”
•
Total Band Settings
– Setting available when
Economizer is set to Fixed Total or Diff Total.
•
Economizer RH
– The damper will modulate when outside air dew point is less than “Economizer
Temp” and “Economizer RH” SP.
• Economizer Enth Band – Damper’s opening position will be based on “Economizer Temp” and
“Economizer RH” SP, minus the “Enth Band.”
•
OA Reset Low
– When OA is below low SP, discharge heat will target “Reset Heat Discharge” setting.
•
OA Reset High
– When OA is above the reset high
SP, the discharge cool will target “Reset Cool
Discharge” setting.
• Reset Cool Discharge/Space – Temperature SP for
“OA Reset High” functionality.
• Reset Heat Discharge/Space – Temperature SP for
“OA Reset Low” functionality.
• Comfort Reheat – Activation SP for comfort reheat.
•
Temp Diff
– When reheat and “Temp Diff” are met, reheat should activate to meet discharge or space
SP.
• On Time – Time delay for comfort reheat activation.
•
Off Time
– Time delay for comfort reheat deactivation.
USER SETTINGS
TEMP SET POINTS
OPTION SET POINTS
ROOM OVERRIDE
RANGE: 40-150°F/4-66°C
DEFAULT: 90°F/31°C
FIRESTAT SET POINTS
CAB HEAT SET POINT
INTAKE
DISCHARGE
FREEZESTAT SET POINTS
RANGE: 100-300°F/38-149°C
DEFAULT: 135°F/57°C
RANGE: 100-300°F/38-149°C
DEFAULT: 240°F/101°C
FREEZESTAT
CAB HEAT
RANGE: (-40)-75°F/(-40)-24°C
DEFAULT: 35°F/2°C
RANGE: 0-40°F/(-18)-4°C
DEFAULT: 0°F/-18°C
DRAIN HEAT SET POINT
OVERHEAT SET POINT
DRAIN HEAT
OVERHEAT
RANGE: 35-45°F/2-7°C
DEFAULT: 35°F/2°C
RANGE: 60-120°F/15-49°C
DEFAULT: 80°F/27°C
ECONOMIZER SETTINGS
TEMP SETTINGS
TEMP OCC/UNOCC
BAND OCC/UNOCC
RANGE: 0-80°F/(-17)-27°C
DEFAULT: 60°F/16°C
RANGE: 0-20°F/0-11°C
DEFAULT: 5°F/3°C
OA RESET LOW
OA RESET HIGH
RESET HEAT DISCHARGE
RESET COOL DISCHARGE
RESET HEAT SPACE
RESET COOL SPACE
COMFORT REHEAT
TOTAL BAND SETTINGS
RH OCC/UNOCC
BAND OCC/UNOCC
RESET LOW
RESET HIGH
HEAT DISCH
COOL DISCH
HEAT SPACE
COOL SPACE
RANGE: 0-90%
DEFAULT: 50%
RANGE: 0-10°F/0-6°C
DEFAULT: 5°F/3°C
RANGE: 35-110°F/7-43°C
DEFAULT: 45°F/7°C
RANGE: 35-110°F/7-43°C
DEFAULT: 75°F/24°C
RANGE: 40-150°F/4-65°C
DEFAULT: 90°F/32°C
RANGE: 40-150°F/4-65°C
DEFAULT: 50°F/10°C
RANGE: (-10)-10°F/(-6)-6°C
DEFAULT: 2°F/1°C
RANGE: (-10)-10°F/(-6)-6°C
DEFAULT: 2°F/1°C
TEMP DIFF
ON TIME
OFF TIME
RANGE: 1-20°F/1-10°C
DEFAULT: 2°F/1°C
RANGE: 1-120 M
DEFAULT: 20 M
RANGE: 1-120 M
DEFAULT: 20 M
60
Scheduling – This menu will only show when the scheduling option is set to On.
•
Schedule Times
– Each day contains the option for three occupied time periods. If the time is scrolled past 11:59 pm, it will display ‘UNOCC’.
•
Copy Schedule
– This will allow the user to copy an existing schedule from one day of the week to individual days in the week, to Week Days, or All.
Fan Speed – Enabled when the supply fan is controlled by a
VFD or ECM. The range of this menu is limited by the min and max Set Points (SP) under factory settings. When the fan is set to VFD, the settings will be displayed in Hertz. When the fan is set to ECM, the PWM percentage will be displayed.
When occupied scheduling is set to On, occupied and unoccupied settings are available.
Outdoor Air Setting
– Enabled when the outdoor air is set to percentage/voltage or scheduled control. Limited by min and max outdoor air percentages/voltages located under factory settings.
Compressor Freq
– Allows user to set desired frequency.
Available when the compressor control is set to manual.
Man Cond Fan Speed
- Adjust OCC only if system is on schedule.
•
Heat
– Enabled when heat pump condensing fan mode is set to manual. Select the % the fans will operate at.
•
Cool
– Enabled when cooling condensing fan mode is set to manual, you may select the % the fans will operate at.
Pressure Config
– Adjustable pressure SP for building static pressure.
Single Zone VAV
- When single zone VAV is enabled to the blower, damper, or both, depending on settings, will modulate linearly between min and max discharge.
•
Blower Speed Heat
- Min/Max stage settings for blower speed in heating mode.
• Damper Pos Heat - Min/Max settings for damper position in heating mode.
•
Blower Speed Cool
- Min/Max stage settings for blower speed in cooling mode.
• Damper Pos Cool - Min/Max settings for damper position in cooling mode.
Dry Mode Config
– The user will be allowed to check or adjust the SP/limits when the option is enabled.
ERV Settings – Allows access to Energy Recovery Ventilator
(ERV) settings.
•
ERV Wheel
– Speed percentage setting for ERV wheel operation.
• ERV Exhaust Fan – Adjustable building pressure SP, manual, or differential SP. Values dependent on ERV exhaust fan configuration.
•
ERV Wheel Cleaning
– Manual control allows On/Off.
Auto allows for a timed scheduled cleaning. When On, countdown timer will be active.
USER SETTINGS
SCHEDULING
SCHEDULING TIMES
COPY SCHEDULE
MONDAY-SUNDAY
COPY FROM “DAY”
COPY TO “DAY”/WEEKDAYS/ALL
START A/B/C - UNOCC/TIME
END A/B/C - UNOCC/TIME
FAN SPEED (VFD)
FREQ (OCC/UNOCC)
RANGE: MIN-MAX FREQ
DEFAULT: 60 HZ
FAN SPEED (ECM)
RATE (OCC/UNOCC)
LOW (OCC/UNOCC)
HIGH (OCC/UNOCC)
RANGE: 0-100%
DEFAULT: 100%
OUTDOOR AIR SETTINGS
PERCENT or VOLTAGE
OCC/UNOCC
COMPRESSOR FREQ
RANGE: 0-100% or 0-10V
DEFAULT: MIN % or MIN V
FREQ*
(VZH044 and smaller)
FREQ*
RANGE: 30-200 HZ
DEFAULT: 200 HZ
(VZH052-VZH065)
FREQ*
(VZH088 and larger)
RANGE: 50-330 HZ
DEFAULT: 330 HZ
RANGE: 50-330 HZ
DEFAULT: 200 HZ
MAN COND FAN SPEED
HEAT
COOL
RANGE: 0-100%
DEFAULT: 100%
RANGE: 0-100%
DEFAULT: 100%
PRESSURE CONFIG
RANGE: (-15.0) - HIGH
DEFAULT: 0.00 "WC
RANGE: LOW - 15.0
DEFAULT: 0.10 "WC
SINGLE ZONE VAV
BLOWER SPEED HEAT
DAMPER POS HEAT
BLOWER SPEED COOL
DAMPER POS COOL
RANGE: MIN-MAX Hz
DEFAULT: 0 Hz/60 Hz
RANGE: MIN - MAX %
DEFAULT: 0/100%
RANGE: MIN - MAX Hz
DEFAULT: 0/60 Hz
RANGE: MIN - MAX %
DEFAULT: 0/100%
DRY MODE CONFIG
RH OCC/UNOCC
DISCHARGE OCC/UNOCC
INTAKE OCC/UNOCC
RANGE: 20-80%
DEFAULT: 50%
RANGE: 40-150°F/4-66°C
DEFAULT: 90°F/13°C
RANGE: 35-110°F/2-43°C
DEFAULT: 45°F/7°C
ERV SETTINGS
ERV EXHAUST FAN
ERV WHEEL SPEED
ERV WHEEL CLEANING
SPEED OCC/UNOCC
SPEED OCC/UNOCC
STATE
RANGE: MIN - MAX FAN SPEED
DEFAULT: 75%
RANGE: 20-100%
DEFAULT: VARIES BY MODE
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
STATE ON
CLEANING ACTIVE
ENDS IN 60 S
61
Dynamic SP Diff – Temperature differential for Set Point
(SP) change.
Dynamic SP Offset
– Temperature amount that will change per differential.
Dynamic Heat OA – Outdoor air dynamic heat set point.
Dynamic Cool OA
– Outdoor air dynamic cool set point.
CO2 Control Config
– CO2 Parts Per Million (PPM) SP and sensor settings.
• PPM Low/High – CO2 PPM threshold SP for the space, used in CO2 Override.
•
PPM Limit
- CO2 PPM threshold limit set point.
•
Sensor Min/Max
– Set minimum and maximum range setting for CO2 sensor.
Active Faults
– Contains the current faults on the board.
Fault History
– Displays time-stamped history of the last 20 faults, most recent fault showing first.
Reset Lockouts – Displayed when a lockout fault has occurred. Enter menu to reset fault(s).
USER SETTINGS
DYNAMIC SP DIFF
DIFF
RANGE: 0-50°F/0-25°C
DEFAULT: 10°F/5°C
DYNAMIC SP OFFSET
OFFSET
RANGE: (-20)-20°F/(-11)-11°C
DEFAULT: 1°F/1°C
DYNAMIC HEAT OA
HEAT OA
RANGE: 0-110°F/(-18)-43°C
DEFAULT: 30°F/-1°C
DYNAMIC COOL OA
COOL OA
RANGE: 35-110°F/2-43°C
DEFAULT: 80°F/27°C
CO2 CONTROL CONFIG
PPM LOW (OCC/UNOCC)
PPM HIGH (OCC/UNOCC)
PPM LIMIT
SENSOR MIN
SENSOR MAX
RANGE: 0 PPM-PPM HIGH
DEFAULT: 500 PPM
RANGE: PPM LOW-2,000 PPM
DEFAULT: 1,000
RANGE: 1-2,499 PPM
DEFAULT: 1,000
SET RANGE TO CO2
SENSOR MIN SETTING
SET RANGE TO CO2
SENSOR MAX SETTING
ACTIVE FAULTS
FAULT HISTORY
RESET LOCKOUTS
DISPLAYS ACTIVE FAULTS
DISPLAYS UP TO
20 FAULTS
RESETS ACTIVE
LOCKOUTS
62
FACTORY SETTINGS Factory Menu Password = 1111
Temperature Control – The MUA board monitors temperature control components.
•
Temperature Mode
– There are five options for controlling the output of the unit in heat/cool tempering mode. These options are Discharge/Space/Analog/Direct Digital Control
“Sequence of Operation” on page 81
•
Activate Based On
– The unit can be set to “Activate On” during the following temperature readings: Intake/Space/
Both/Either/Stat (field installed thermostat). These settings can be altered for occupied and unoccupied preferences.
When Activate Based On is set to Stat, thermostat inputs and intake temperatures are monitored to activate heating/ cooling.
•
Construction Mode
– Configurable option for units used in construction settings.
Heating Config – Allows the user to set various heating configurations.
•
Heating Type
– Selectable range: None, Indirect, Heat
Pump, Electric, HP & Ind, HP & Elec, HP or Elec.
• Heat Hyst
• Space – The space tempering sensor must go this amount of degrees above the set point before heating turns off.
•
Intake
– The intake tempering sensor must go this amount of degrees above the set point before heating turns off.
•
2nd Disch Sensor
– When an additional thermistor is added, the two thermistor readings will be averaged together.
•
Input Source
– This lets the board know what signal (volts or milliamps) to expect from the analog control system.
• Gas Heat Config
•
# of Heat Stages
– Default is set to 0 for units without gas heat. Select 1 for units equipped with gas heat.
Select 2 for units equipped with gas heat and high turndown.
• Relay Delays
•
ROT
– This is the time after a furnace loses a call for heat before the furnace shuts down.
• RCT – If the heat stage value is greater than 1, the user may adjust Relay Close Time (RCT) delay for stages.
•
Powervent Config
– The power vent operation may be set to operate in modulation mode or in an On/Off mode. The available settings are Triac Mod, PV On
Off, or PWM Mod.
•
Furnace Float
– Monitors the water level from condensation in the drain pan. Default is Off, select On if a switch is installed on the unit. Required on high-efficiency furnaces.
•
High Turndown
– Enable this option to On when the unit is equipped with a split furnace.
FACTORY SETTINGS
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
TEMPERING MODE
HEAT (OCC/UNOCC)
CONSTRUCTION MODE ENABLE
DISCHARGE, SPACE,
ANALOG, DDC
COOL (OCC/UNOCC)
ACTIVATE BASED ON
INTAKE, SPACE,
ANALOG, DDC
ACT (OCC/UNOCC)
INTAKE/SPACE/
BOTH/EITHER/STAT
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
HEATING CONFIG
HEATING TYPE
NONE (DEFAULT), INDIRECT, HEAT PUMP, ELECTRIC,
HP & IND, HP & ELEC, HP OR ELEC
HEAT HYST
2ND DISCH SENSOR
INPUT SOURCE
SPACE
RANGE: 0-10°F/0-6°C
DEFAULT: 1°F/1°C
INTAKE
ENABLE
RANGE: 0-10°F/0-6°C
DEFAULT: 3°F/2°C
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
0-10VDC, 2-10VDC,
0-20mA, 4-20mA
JOB SPECIFIC
GAS HEAT CONFIG
# OF HEAT STAGES
RANGE: 0-4
DEFAULT: 0
RELAY DELAYS
ROT
RCT 2/3
RANGE: 30-240 S
DEFAULT: 45 S
RANGE: 30-600 S
DEFAULT: VARIES
POWERVENT CONFIG
MODE
TRIAC MOD, PV ON OFF,
PWM MODE
FURNACE FLOAT
ENABLE
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
HIGH TURNDOWN
ENABLE
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
63
• Heat Pump Config
•
Cond Fan Config
•
Mode
– The condensing fans can operate from one of the following modes: Outside Temperature Differential or Manual.
•
OA Diff
– If the outside temperature differential is selected, the default temperature is set at 15°F.
•
Min Speed/Max Speed
– The minimum and maximum rate the condensing fans will operate. Minimum default is 15%. Maximum default is 100%.
•
Defrost Config
• Mode – This allows for the unit to defrost the outdoor coil in the case of freezing ambient conditions.
User may set defrost method to Off/Timer/Press-
Temp.
•
Time Off
– If the timer option is selected, the time off default is 15 minutes.
•
Time On
– Minutes between defrost cycles if in timer or temperature mode.
•
Min Suc PS
– If the pressure/temperature defrost setting is selected, the suction pressure default is set to 40 psi.
• Min Suc Temp – If the pressure/temperature defrost setting is selected, the suction temperature default is 5°F.
•
Comp Max Freq
– Limits the maximum run speed of the compressor.
•
HP Set Points
•
Min OA Temp
– The heat pump will shut off at the set minimum temperature. The default temperature setting is 45°F.
•
Max OA Temp
– The heat pump will shut off at the set maximum temperature. The default temperature setting is 75°F.
• Superheat – Monitors what state the refrigerant is in as it leaves the evaporator coil. The superheat default setting is 20°F.
•
High Ambient
– Option optimizes heat pump operation when outside temperatures increase to avoid high head pressures from the compressor.
•
Cabinet Hyst
– This is the differential for the cabinet heater. The outdoor air temp must reach this many degrees above the activation set point to turn off.
•
Freezestat Timer
– The discharge temp must stay below the freezestat set point for this amount of time before the unit will lock-out on freeze stat. Heat Stage is set to less or equal to 1, 5 minute default timer. Heat Stage is set to greater than 1, 10 minute default timer.
•
Heat + Dehumid
– Allows dehumidification to run while the unit is heating.
FACTORY SETTINGS
HEATING CONFIG
HEAT PUMP CONFIG
COND FAN CONFIG
MODE
OA DIFF
MIN/MAX SPEED
MANUAL, OA TEMP DIFF
DEFAULT: OA TEMP DIFF
RANGE: 0-40°F/0-22°C
DEFAULT: 15°F/3°C
RANGE: 0-100%
DEFAULT: MIN 15%/MAX 100%
DEFROST CONFIG
COMP MAX FREQ
MODE
TIME OFF
TIME ON
MIN SUC PS
MIN SUC TEMP
FREQ
OFF, TIMER, PRESS/TEMP
DEFAULT: OFF
RANGE: 0-100 M
DEFAULT: 15 M
RANGE: 5-100 M
DEFAULT: 10 M
RANGE: 30-100 PSI
DEFAULT: 40 PSI
RANGE: (-20)-40°F/(-29)-4°C
DEFAULT: 5°F/(-15)°C
RANGE: MIN - MAX HZ
DEFAULT: VARIES
HP SET POINTS
MIN OA TEMP
MAX OA TEMP
RANGE: 0-90°F/(-18)-27°C
DEFAULT: 35°F/7°C
RANGE: 0-90°F/(-18)-27°C
DEFAULT: 65°F/18°C
HIGH AMBIENT
CABINET HYST
FREEZESTAT TIMER
HEAT + DEHUMID
SUPERHEAT
ENABLE
HYST
RANGE: 5-45°F/2-25°C
DEFAULT: 20°F/12°C
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
RANGE: 1-10°F/0-6°C
DEFAULT: 1°F/1°C
MINUTES
ENABLE
RANGE: 1-20 M
DEFAULT: 5 M/10 M
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
64
Cooling Config – Allows the user to set various cooling configurations.
•
Min Cool (OA) Temp
– Cooling will not activate when outdoor air temperature is below this set point.
• Min Cool Intake Temp – Cooling will not activate when intake temperature is below this set point.
•
Cond Fan Config
•
Mode
– The condensing fans can operate from one of the following modes: Outside Temperature Differential or Manual.
• OA Diff – If the outside temperature differential is selected, the default temperature is set at 20°F.
• Min Speed/Max Speed – The minimum and maximum rate the condensing fans will operate.
• Comp Max Freq – Limits the maximum run speed of the compressor.
•
Cool Hyst
•
Intake
– The intake tempering sensor must change this amount of degrees below the set point before cooling turns off.
• Space – The space tempering sensor must change this amount of degrees below the set point before cooling turns off.
•
Reheat Config
• Reheat Mode – RH&DP, DP, RH, VP, VP&RH, Off selection. When RH/DP is selected, software will monitor both dew point and relative humidity for reheat activation. When only DP is selected, software will monitor dew point for reheat activation. When only RH is selected, software will monitor relative humidity for reheat activation. When only VP is selected, software will monitor vapor pressure for reheat activation. When
VP&RH is selected, software will monitor both vapor pressure and relative humidity for reheat activation.
When Off is selected, reheat will not be active.
•
Valve Limits
– Min and max settings for reheat valve position.
•
RH/DP Input Mode
– When reheat mode is set to RH/
DP, the user may select between DP or RH.
•
Differentials
•
Space
– Reheat will activate if the cooling mode is set to SPACE, the inside coil temperature and the desired reheat set point is less than the intake dew point minus the space differential.
•
Discharge
– Reheat will activate if the cooling mode is set to DISCHARGE, the inside coil temperature and the desired reheat set point is less than the intake dew point minus the discharge differential.
•
RH Hyst
•
Intake
– The intake RH/DP must go below the intake RH/DP set point plus intake reheat hyst before reheat turns off.
•
Space
– The space RH/DP must go below the intake RH/DP set point plus intake reheat hyst before reheat turns off.
FACTORY SETTINGS
COOLING CONFIG
MIN COOL OA TEMP
MIN COOL INTAKE TEMP
MIN TEMP*
MIN TEMP
(LOW AMBIENT = ON)
MIN TEMP
(EXT LOW AMBIENT = ON)
MIN TEMP
COND FAN CONFIG
COMP MAX FREQ
MODE
OA DIFF
MIN/MAX SPEED
FREQ
(VZH044 and smaller)
FREQ
(VZH052-VZH065)
FREQ
(VZH088 and larger)
MANUAL, OA TEMP DIFF
DEFAULT: OA TEMP DIFF
RANGE: 0-40°F/0-22°C
DEFAULT: 15°F/3°C
RANGE: 0-100%
DEFAULT: MIN 15%/MAX 100%
RANGE: 30-200 HZ
DEFAULT: 200 HZ
RANGE: 50-330 HZ
DEFAULT: 330 HZ
RANGE: 50-330 HZ
DEFAULT: 200 HZ
COOL HYST
SPACE
INTAKE
RANGE: 0-10°F/0-6°C
DEFAULT: 1°F/1°C
RANGE: 0-10°F/0-6°C
DEFAULT: 3°F/2°C
REHEAT CONFIG
REHEAT MODE
VALVE LIMITS
RH/DP INPUT MODE
OFF (DEFAULT) , RH, DP,
RH&DP, VP, VP&RH
RANGE: 0-100%
DEFAULT: MIN 0%/ MAX 100%
RH/DP
DEFAULT: DP
DIFFERENTIALS
RANGE: 50-70°F/10-32°C
DEFAULT: 55°F/13°C
RANGE: (-5)-70°F/(-20)-32°C
DEFAULT: 0°F/(-18)°C
RANGE: (-25)-70°F/(-32)-21°C
DEFAULT: (-25)°F/(-32)°C
RANGE: 40-70°F/4-21°C
DEFAULT: 55°F/13°C
SPACE
DISCHARGE
RANGE: (-30)-30°F/0-17°C
DEFAULT: 2°F/1°C
RANGE: (-30)-20°F/0-11°C
DEFAULT: 2°F/1°C
RH HYST
INTAKE
SPACE
RANGE: 0-5%/°F (C)
DEFAULT: 1%/°F (C)
RANGE: 0-5%/°F (C)
DEFAULT: 1%/°F (C)
65
• Dew Point Adjust – Occ and Unocc settings for dew point adjust. This value determines what dew point the unit will cool to before reheating occurs. If the reheat dew point adjust is set to 5°F, and the reheat set points’ dew point is set to 50°F, the unit will cool the air to 45°F before reheating.
•
Low Load
– When On, if the unit is only dehumidifying and heating shuts cooling down, the unit should not try to cool again via RH activation until there is a call for cooling from temp activation. When Off, if the unit is only dehumidifying and heating shuts cooling down, the unit can try to cool again via RH activation.
• Reheat Valve Model – Valve model selection.
•
Reheat Optimization
– When enabled On, user may adjust optimization On/Off Timers.
• On Time – Increase condensing fan differential when reheat PID is at 100% for On Time setting and outdoor temp is below 76°F.
• Off Time – Decrease condensing fan differential when reheat PID is at 0% for Off Time setting and outdoor temp is above 77°F.
•
Aux Reheat
– Activates auxiliary heat source (gas or electric) when the unit is not meeting heating set point.
A On/Off timer setting will be active when Aux Reheat is On.
•
Dual Reheat
– Allows hot gas reheat and auxiliary heat to operate at the same time.
•
2nd Evap Sensor
– When active, the evap temperature will be averaged between the two sensors.
•
Dynamic DP Config
– Adjusts target evaporator temperature when the space/discharge humidity set point is satisfied to help reduce unit’s energy usage.
• Min Adj/Max Adj – Minimum and maximum DP adjustment range. Minimum adjustment range default setting for Space is 5°F/Discharge is 1°F.
Maximum range adjustment default setting for
Space is 10°F/Discharge is 5°F. Occ and Unocc settings are available.
•
Reheat Oil Boost
– When an oil boost is active, the reheat valve will move to set position.
•
Comfort Reheat
– When On, reheat will be utilized when mechanical cooling cannot achieve max cool discharge.
•
Superheat Set Point
– Monitors what state the refrigerant is in as it leaves the evaporator coil. The superheat default setting is 20°F.
•
Overheat Timer
– The discharge temperature must not exceed the set point for 30 minutes (default), or the unit will shut down. When in cooling, the unit will wait for the
“Comp Min Off Time” for the compressor, then re-attempt to cool again. If the overheat stat fails again, everything will shut down and display the fault “Overheat Stat Failure.”
FACTORY SETTINGS
COOLING CONFIG
REHEAT CONFIG
DEW POINT ADJUST
LOW LOAD
REHEAT VALVE MODEL
OCC/UNOCC DP ADJ
ENABLE
MODEL
RANGE: 0-20°F/0-10°C
DEFAULT: DISCHARGE 5°F/3°C
SPACE 10°F/6°C
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
MTW
DEFAULT: MTW
REHEAT OPTIMIZATION
AUX REHEAT
DUAL REHEAT
2ND EVAP SENSOR
ENABLE
ON TIME
OFF TIME
ENABLE
ENABLE
ENABLE
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
RANGE: 1-10 M
DEFAULT: 5 M
RANGE: 1-10 M
DEFAULT: 5 M
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
DYNAMIC DP CONFIG
REHEAT OIL BOOST
COMFORT REHEAT
SUPERHEAT SET POINT
OVERHEAT TIMER
ENABLE
MIN ADJ
MAX ADJ
SP
MINUTES
VALVE POS
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
RANGE: (-5)-30°F/(-3)-17°C
DEFAULT: DISCHARGE 1°F/1°C
SPACE 5°F/3°C
RANGE: (-5)-30°F/(-3)-17°C
DEFAULT: DISCHARGE 5°F/3°C
SPACE 10°F/6°C
RANGE: 50-100%
DEFAULT: 50%
ENABLE
RANGE: 5-45°F/2-25°C
DEFAULT: 20°F/12°C
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
RANGE: 1-60 M
DEFAULT: 30 M
66
• Low Ambient Cooling – When enabled, the unit can adjust internal parameters and allow cooling operation down to 0°F ambient.
•
Act Temp
– Low ambient logic will activate below this set point.
•
EEV Pos
– Sets min position for EEV during startup.
•
EEV Control
– Sets duration of minimum EEV position at startup.
•
Thrttl Delay
– Prevents low side throttle at startup.
•
Cond Min/Cond Max
– The minimum and maximum rate the condensing fans will operate at low ambient conditions.
•
Superht SP
– Superheat target during extreme low ambient start-up.
•
Superht Time
– Timer for modified superheat target at start-up.
•
Extreme Low Ambient
– When enabled, the unit can adjust cooling operation down to -25°F ambient.
• Act Temp – Extreme low ambient logic will activate below this set point.
• EEV Pos – Sets minimum position for EEV at startup.
•
EEV Control
– Sets duration of minimum EEV position at startup.
•
Thrttl Delay
– Prevents low side throttle at startup.
•
Sol Active
– A timer for the bypass solenoid to boost suction pressure on startup.
•
Sol Delay
– A delay timer before bypass solenoid opens after start-up.
•
Cond Min/Cond Max
– The minimum and maximum rate the condensing fans will operate at extreme low ambient conditions.
•
Supply Duct Adj
– When set to On, the discharge temperature offset is used to ensure there is no condensation on uninsulated supply duct(s).
•
Adjust
- The offset amount the discharge will be from space dew point.
Compressor Config – User may change or adjust compressor settings.
•
Compressor Model
– Compressor model selection.
•
Control Mode
– Allows the user to turn the compressor on between manual or auto control.
• Max Discharge Temp – Limits discharge temperature out of the compressor.
•
Comp Min Times
• Min On – Amount of time the compressor stays on.
•
Min Off
– Amount of time the compressor is off after being active.
•
Oil Sensor
– Default is On. If an oil sensor is present, leave option set to ON.
•
Oil Boost Time
– User may set boost option for compressor. Settings are OFF or 1-120 minutes.
•
Pumpdown Sequence
– Used for compressor protection in an off-cycle. Before the pumpdown sequence begins, an oil boost will run to return oil back to the compressor before shutting down.
FACTORY SETTINGS
COOLING CONFIG
LOW AMBIENT COOLING
ENABLE
ACT TEMP
EEV POS
EEV CONTROL
THRTTL DELAY
COND MIN/MAX
SUPERHT SP
SUPERHT TIME
EXTREME LOW AMBIENT
ENABLE
ACT TEMP
EEV POS
EEV CONTROL
THRTTL DELAY
SOL ACTIVE
SOL DELAY
COND MIN/MAX
SUPPLY DUCT ADJ
ENABLE
ADJUST
COMPRESSOR CONFIG
COMPRESSOR MODEL
CONTROL MODE
MAX DISCHARGE TEMP
COMP MIN TIMES
OIL SENSOR
OIL BOOST TIME
PUMPDOWN SEQUENCE
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
RANGE: 45-60°F/7-15°C
DEFAULT: 55°F/13°C
RANGE: 0-100%
DEFAULT: 35%
RANGE: 0-600 S
DEFAULT: 180 S
RANGE: 0-900 S
DEFAULT: 180 S
RANGE: 0-100%
DEFAULT: MIN 9%/ MAX 100%
RANGE: 5-25°F/(-15)-(-4)°C
DEFAULT: 10°F/(-12)°C
RANGE: 0-600 S
DEFAULT: 180 S
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
RANGE: (-5)-5°F/(-21)-(-15)°C
DEFAULT: 0°F/(-18)°C
RANGE: 0-100%
DEFAULT: 35%
RANGE: 0-600 S
DEFAULT: 180 S
RANGE: 0-600 S
DEFAULT: 240 S
RANGE: 0-900 S
DEFAULT: 300 S
RANGE: 0-600 S
DEFAULT: 180 S
RANGE: 0-100%
DEFAULT: MIN 9%/ MAX 100%
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
RANGE: 0-10°F (0-6°C)
DEFAULT: 2°F/1°C
VZH028, 035, 044, 052, 065,
088, 117, 170
MODE
MAX TEMP
MIN ON/OFF
ENABLE
MINUTES
ENABLE
MANUAL/AUTO
DEFAULT: AUTO
RANGE: 212-302°F/100-150°C
DEFAULT: 212°F/100°C
RANGE: 1-20 M
DEFAULT: 10 M
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: ON
RANGE: OFF/1-120 M
DEFAULT: OFF
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: ON
67
EEV Config – Allows user to set Electronic Expansion Valve
(EEV) model and adjust EEV position values.
• EEV Model – Selectable range of EEV models.
•
Min Value
– Adjustable between 0% to max set point.
•
Max Value
– Adjustable from min set point to 100%.
ERV Config
– If the Energy Recovery Ventilator (ERV) option is enabled, ERV settings and parameters will be visible.
•
Energy Recovery
– On/Off selection. If the energy recovery option is set to ON, menus will be available to adjust various energy recovery settings.
• Recovery Act Control – Selectable control type and dead band for ERV operation.
•
Wheel Model
– Each ERV size has a dedicated model.
The user may set the wheel model type.
• Wheel Control – Auto or manual control settings.
•
Monitoring Sensors
– Values that are associated with the operation of the ERV. Sensor pressure values monitor how much dirt and debris are collected on the filters and wheel.
• Exhaust Fan Config – ERV exhaust blower settings.
•
Control
– Selectable control type for exhaust blower.
• Staging – Selectable activation modes for exhaust blower. Only available with certain modes.
• Min Speed Occ/Unocc – User may adjust range between 0% to max value set point. When occupied settings are enabled, two set points will be available.
•
Max Speed Occ/Unocc
– When occupied settings are enabled, two set points will be available.
•
Purge Speed
– Fixed speed the exhaust fan will operate when purge is activated.
•
Low PS Lim
– Low pressure limit setting for building differential pressure.
•
High PS Lim
– High pressure limit setting for building differential pressure.
•
Cycle Time
– Cycle time is the time between two consecutive readings.
•
PS KP
– Proportionally constant value for static pressure measured in V/sec.
•
PS Hyst
– Building pressure must go above or below hysteresis value for fan adjust accordingly.
•
S REF KP
– Proportionally constant value for supply fan pressure measured in V/sec. Only displayed when
Exhaust Fan Control is set to supply reference.
• S REF DB – Defines the limits the unit will adjust to keep supply fan reference. Only displayed when
Exhaust Fan Control is set to supply reference.
•
S REF SP
– If the pressure difference between the supply and exhaust is greater/less than this set point, the MUA board will attempt to adjust the output voltage until it matches the supply reference set point.
•
EF Comm
– ERV communication loss, dictates functionality of exhaust fan when communication is lost between exhaust fan and ERV.
•
Wheel Size
– Direct drive wheel size selection. The wheel size selection will be utilized for CFM monitoring. Models available are 11, 13, 15, 18, 20, 24, 30, 36,
16Z, 18Z, 20Z, 22Z, 25Z, 28Z.
FACTORY SETTINGS
EEV CONFIG
EEV MODEL
MIN VALUE
MAX VALUE
SER-F, SER-C (DEFAULT), SER-D,
SER-G, ETS-12, ETS-24, ETS-25
RANGE: 0-MAX %
DEFAULT: 0%
RANGE: MIN-100%
DEFAULT: 100%
ERV CONFIG
ENERGY RECOVERY ENABLE
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
RECOVERY ACT CTRL
HEAT ACT
COOL ACT
DEADBAND (SENSIBLE)
DEADBAND (ENTHALPY)
WHEEL MODEL
WHEEL CONTROL
MODEL
MODE
NONE, SENSIBLE,
ENTHALPY, BOTH
NONE, SENSIBLE,
ENTHALPY, BOTH
RANGE: 0-5°F
DEFAULT: 2°F
RANGE: 0-3 BTU/LB
DEFAULT: 0.5 BTU/LB
ERC 3628C, ERC 4136C,
ERC 5262C
AUTO, MANUAL
DEFAULT: AUTO
MONITORING SENSORS
DOOR INTERLOCK
CLOG FILTER
FRST WHEEL
EXH AIR PS
OA FR BASE
RA FR BASE
SA WD BASE
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: ON
RANGE: 0-2”
DEFAULT: 0.25”
RANGE: 0-2”
DEFAULT: 0.4”
RANGE: 0.0-0.5”
DEFAULT: 0.1”
RANGE: (-5”)-5” wc
DEFAULT: 0.70” wc
RANGE: (-5”)-5” wc
DEFAULT: 1.50” wc
RANGE: (-5”)-5” wc
DEFAULT: 0.60” wc
EXHAUST FAN CONFIG
CONTROL
STAGING
MIN SPD OCC/UNOCC
MAX SPD OCC/UNOCC
PURGE SPEED
LOW PS LIM
HIGH PS LIM
CYCLE TIME
PS KP
PS HYST
S REF KP
S REF DB
S REF DB
EF COMM
WHEEL SIZE
SUPPLY REF, MANUAL
(DEFAULT), 0-10V, STATIC PS
ERV ON, ALWAYS ON
DEFAULT: ALWAYS ON
RANGE: 0-100%
DEFAULT: 10%
RANGE: 0-100%
DEFAULT: 100%
RANGE: 0-100%
DEFAULT: 75%
RANGE: (-5”)-5” wc
DEFAULT: -0.25” wc
RANGE: (-5”)-5” wc
DEFAULT: 0.25” wc
RANGE: 5-60 S
DEFAULT: 5 S
RANGE: 0-20 V/S
DEFAULT: 8 V/S
RANGE: 0-100%
DEFAULT: 25%
RANGE: 0.05-2 V/S
DEFAULT: 0.1 V/S
RANGE: 0.0-2”
DEFAULT: 0.0.5”
RANGE: 0.0-2”
DEFAULT: 0.0.5”
OFF/CONTINUE
DEFAULT: OFF
11D,13D, 15D, 18D, 20D, 24D,
30D, 36D, 16Z,18Z, 20Z, 22Z,
25Z, 28Z
68
• Defrost Control – Optional monitoring and wheel control that will keep frost from forming, or melt the frost if it has formed.
•
Mode
– Selectable activation type for frost control.
• OA Temp SP – If Temp/RH defrost is selected, the OA temp must be below set point for the ERV to enter defrost mode.
•
EA Temp SP
– If Temp/RH defrost is selected, the EA temp must be below set point for the ERV to enter defrost mode.
•
RA RH SP
– If Temp/RH defrost is selected, the RA
RH must be above set point for the ERV to enter defrost mode.
•
On Time
– Set time in which the enthalpy wheel spins at the defrost wheel speed setting.
•
Off Time
– Set time the ERV cannot activate into a defrost cycle after a cycle has completed.
• Speed – Adjustable speed which the user may set the enthalpy wheel speed during defrost cycle.
•
Wheel Cleaning
– Wheel cleaning settings.
•
Mode
– Selectable activation modes for wheel cleaning cycle.
•
On Time
– Amount of time the cleaning cycle is on when activated.
•
Off Time
– Amount of time that if the ERV is continuously off will activate a cleaning cycle.
•
Min OA Damper Pos
– Adjustable set point for the damper to activate.
• Staging Control – Adjustable time value that corresponds to the staging of the ERV and the Dedicated Outdoor Air
System (DOAS) unit.
Occupancy Config
•
Scheduling
– This menu is where scheduling may be turned On or Off.
• Override – Allows the user to override the current occupied settings. This is an On/Off option.
Unit Options
• Board Config
• Unit Address – Modbus address of the MUA board.
•
Startup Timer
– Time upon power-up where the board will sit idle.
•
Temp Units
– Allows the user to set temperature range. Changing between the two will reset all set points. The board will reset as well.
FACTORY SETTINGS
COOLING CONFIG
OCCUPANCY CONFIG
ERV CONFIG
DEFROST CONTROL
MODE
EF COMM
OA TEMP SP
EA TEMP SP
RA RH SP
ON TIME
OFF TIME
SPEED
TEMP/RH, OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
OFF/CONTINUE
DEFAULT: OFF
RANGE: (-40)-60°F
DEFAULT: 0°F
RANGE: (-40)-60°F
DEFAULT: 35°F
RANGE: 0-100%
DEFAULT: 30%
RANGE: 0-60 M
DEFAULT: 10M
RANGE: 0-60 M
DEFAULT: 10M
RANGE: 20-100%
DEFAULT: 20%
WHEEL CLEANING
MIN OA DAMPER POS
MODE
ON TIME
OFF TIME
POSITION
MANUAL, AUTO, OFF
DEFAULT: MANUAL
RANGE: 30-120 S
DEFAULT: 60 S
RANGE: 1-48 H
DEFAULT: 24 H
RANGE: 0-10V or 0-100%
DEFAULT: 8 V or 80%
STAGING CONTROL
ERV TIME
DOAS TIME
RANGE: 0-60 M
DEFAULT: 2 M
RANGE: 1-60 M
DEFAULT: 15 M
SCHEDULING
OVERRIDE
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
UNIT OPTIONS
BOARD CONFIG
UNIT ADDRESS
STARTUP TIMER
TEMP UNITS
ADDRESS
TIME
MODE
80
RANGE: 5-240 S
DEFAULT: 15 S
FAHRENHEIT/CELSIUS
DEFAULT: FAHRENHEIT
69
• HMI Config
•
Number
– The number of HMIs connected to the
MUA board. Must always be at least one.
•
Screensaver
– If set to Off, the home screen will not time out to the screensaver.
•
Average HMI
– If there are multiple space HMIs connected, this menu allows you to select which will be included in the space temperature and relative humidity averaging. If a thermistor or relative humidity sensor is connected into the ST screw terminals, it will automatically be averaged into any HMIs included.
• Temp Stat # – On/Off option to turn on temperature averaging for wired HMI thermistors.
• Lock Screen – If the option is set to On, a password (9999) will be required when; screen saver option is enabled or if any button functions are not pressed for 5 minutes.
•
Scnsvr Date Time
– User may select date, time, and/or temperature to display on the HMI when screensaver is active.
•
DDC Main Config
• Baud - The baud rate of the Modbus communications.
• Word Bits - The amount of data bits over Modbus communications.
• Parity - The parity selection for Modbus communications.
• Stop Bits - The stop bits selection for Modbus communications.
• Blower Config
•
Blower Control
•
120V Contactor
– 120V output on the MUA board to energize the coil of a contactor. This option should be selected when the RTU is used in conjunction with a DCV package.
• ECP – This option should be selected when the
RTU is used in conjunction with a DCV package.
• VFD Manual – HMI selectable VFD frequency.
•
VFD Jog
– For use with VFD using photohelic control. Uses the aux pins to control the VFD. Powering
“Aux 1” will speed the fan up, powering “Aux 2” will slow the fan down. When neither “Aux 1” nor “Aux
2” are powered, the VFD will hold current speed.
•
VFD 0-10V
– For use when an external 0-10V signal is being provided to control the speed of the
VFD.
•
VFD Pressure
– For use with VFDs that use a pressure transducer (0-10V output).
•
ECM (Electronically Controlled Motor)
– HMI selectable supply fan rate.
•
ECM 0-10V
– For use when an external 0-10V signal is being provided to modulate the ECM supply output between min and max speed.
• ECM Pressure – For use with ECMs that use a pressure transducer (0-10V output).
FACTORY SETTINGS
UNIT OPTIONS
BOARD CONFIG
HMI CONFIG
NUMBER
TEMP UNITS
SCREENSAVER
AVERAGE HMI
AVERAGE HMI
LOCK SCREEN
SCNSVR DATE TIME
DDC MAIN CONFIG
BAUD
WORD BITS
PARITY
STOP BITS
BLOWER CONFIG
BLOWER CONTROL
RANGE: 1-5
DEFAULT: 1
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
DATE/TIME,
TEMP/DATE/TIME, TEMP
9600, 19200 (DEFAULT),
38400, 57600, 115200
8/9
DEFAULT: 9
NONE, ODD, EVEN
DEFAULT: EVEN
1/2
DEFAULT: 1
120V CONTACTOR, ECP, VFD MANUAL, VFD
JOG, VFD 0-10V, VFD PRESSURE, ECM,
ECM 0-10V, ECM PRESSURE
70
• Blower Mode:
- If the “Occupied Scheduling” is set to On, the menu screen for the blower mode will allow you to choose
ON/AUTO/OFF for Occupied or Unoccupied.
- If the “Occupied Scheduling” is set to Off, the menu screen for the blower mode will allow you to choose
MANUAL/AUTO/OFF.
- In blower auto mode, the blower will only run when it gets a call for heating/cooling.
- In blower on mode, the blower will run as long as the fan button is enabled regardless of whether the unit is heating/cooling.
- In blower off mode, powering the unit interlock pin will cause the blower to run.
•
Airflow Proving
– User can set unit to prove with airflow sensor located on the board.
•
Blower Delay Enable
– User may set the blower start/ stop delay to Off/Both/Cool/Heat.
•
Blower Delay Time
– A time setting delay for the start or stop of the supply blower.
•
Door Interlock
– When enabled, a “Door Interlock” fault will display when the blower door is open during normal operation.
• Blower Presets – User may set blower preset option
On/Off.
• PWM Rate Limits – Range Min to Max settings for fan speed.
• VFD Direction – Sends a command to the VFD to run in forward or reverse.
• VFD Freq Limits – Range Min to Max settings for fan speed.
• Occ Fan Presets – After the blower has started, the blower setting will use the aux pins to drive the preset occupied value. Refer to
.
•
Unocc Fan Presets
– Allows user to set unoccupied preset blower speed value.
- Fan Preset Default: 1 = 40Hz, 2 = 50Hz, 3 = 0Hz, ï€
4 = 60Hz, 5 = 0Hz, 6 = 0Hz, 7 = 0Hz.
• Occ PWM Presets – After the blower has started, the blower setting will use the aux pins to drive the preset occupied value. Refer to
.
•
Unocc PWM Presets
– Allows user to set unoccupied preset blower speed value.
- PWM Preset Default: 1 = 80%, 2 = 90%, 3 = 0%, ï€
4 = 100%, 5 = 0%, 6 = 0%, 7 = 0%.
FACTORY SETTINGS
UNIT OPTIONS
BLOWER CONFIG
BLOWER MODE OCC/UNOCC
AUTO ( DEFAULT),
INTERLOCK, MANUAL
AIRFLOW PROVING
CONTROL
PS SET POINT
ONBOARD, REMOTE
DEFAULT: ONBOARD
RANGE: 0.05”-0.25” w.c.
DEFAULT: 0.15” w.c.
BLOWER DELAY ENABLE
START DELAY
STOP DELAY
HEAT, COOL, BOTH, OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
HEAT, COOL, BOTH, OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
BLOWER DELAY TIME
DOOR INTERLOCK
BLOWER PRESETS
DELAY START
DELAY STOP
ENABLE
ENABLE
RANGE: 0-120 S
DEFAULT: 90 S
RANGE: 0-120 S
DEFAULT: 90 S
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
PWM RATE LIMITS
OCC/UNOCC MIN
RANGE: 0-MAX %
DEFAULT: 0%
VFD DIRECTION
OCC/UNOCC MAX
DIRECTION
RANGE: MIN-100%
DEFAULT: 100%
FORWARD/REVERSE
DEFAULT: FORWARD
VFD FREQ LIMITS
OCC/UNOCC MIN
OCC/UNOCC MAX
OCC FAN PRESETS PRESET 1-7
RANGE: 0-MAX Hz
DEFAULT: 0Hz
RANGE: MIN-80Hz
DEFAULT: 60Hz
RANGE: 0-60Hz
DEFAULT: VARIES
UNOCC FAN PRESETS PRESET 1-7
RANGE: 0-60Hz
DEFAULT: VARIES
OCC PWM PRESETS
UNOCC PWM PRESETS
PRESET 1-7
PRESET 1-7
RANGE: 0-100%
DEFAULT: VARIES
RANGE: 0-100%
DEFAULT: VARIES
71
• Pressure Config
•
Sensor Range
– Menu is available when any blower pressure or mixing box pressure option is selected.
•
Static PS KP
– Proportionally constant value for static pressure measured in V/sec.
•
Cycle Time
– Cycle time is the time between two consecutive readings.
•
Static PS Hysteresis
– This is the hysteresis band used for the static pressure (SP) set point.
•
Purge Config
•
Purge Button
– When enabled On, a purge button will be displayed on the HMI. When the purge button is pressed, the damper will open to max outdoor air and turn on the exhaust contactor.
• Purge Time – This is the amount of time that the unit will run the purge process if the user does not stop the purge manually.
•
Purge Speed
– Adjustable between VFD Min and Max frequency. This is the speed the blower will run during the purge cycle. ECM Purge Speed – Adjustable between PWM Min and Max frequency. This is the speed the blower will run during the purge cycle.
• Dry Mode Config – When enabled On, a dry mode button will be displayed on the HMI. When the dry mode button is pressed, the blower will activate (if not already operating).
•
Monitoring Sensors
– On/Off selection for possible options: Smoke Detector, Filter Monitor, Intake Firestat,
Discharge Firestat, Freezestat, Freezestat RA, Overheat,
Low Gas Switch, High Gas Switch, CO Shutdown
•
Outdoor Air Config
•
Outdoor Air Control
– Off, Manual, 2 Position, Outdoor Air %, Analog Control, Pressure, 100% OA.
•
Outdoor Air Deadband
– If the temperature difference between the outdoor and return sensor is less than or equal to this set point, the MUA board will not attempt to adjust the output voltage until it matches the outdoor air percentage set point. This setting only takes effect when either outdoor air % or schedule is selected.
• Return As Space – Setting this to On will not require a space sensor or HMI. This setting will use the return air thermistor (RT) in place of the space.
•
Outdoor Air Limits
– Minimum and maximum settings for mixing box. Percentage or voltage based on mixing box selection.
•
Min/Max Outdoor Air %
– Minimum and maximum allowed outdoor air percentage.
• Min Outdoor Air – Minimum allowed outdoor air voltage range.
•
Max Outdoor Air
– Maximum allowed outdoor air voltage range.
FACTORY SETTINGS
UNIT OPTIONS
PRESSURE CONFIG
SENSOR RANGE
STATIC PS KP
CYCLE TIME
PS HYSTERESIS
RANGE
KP
CYCLE
HYSTERESIS
RANGE: +/- .25” or +/- .15” w.c.
DEFAULT: +/- .25” w.c.
RANGE: 0.10-0.15 V
DEFAULT: 0.15 V
RANGE: 5-60 S
DEFAULT: 5 S
RANGE: 15-35%
DEFAULT: 25%
PURGE CONFIG
PURGE BUTTON
PURGE TIME
ENABLE
DURATION
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
RANGE: 1-120 M
DEFAULT: 15 M
PURGE SPEED
DRY MODE CONFIG
VFD
ECM
ENABLE
RANGE: MIN-MAX Hz
DEFAULT: 60 Hz
RANGE: MIN-MAX%
DEFAULT: 100%
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
MONITORING SENSORS
SMOKE DETECTOR
FILTER MONITOR
INTAKE FIRESTAT
DSCHRG FIRESTAT
FREEZESTAT
FREEZESTAT RA
OVERHEAT
LOW GAS SWITCH
HIGH GAS SWITCH
CO SHUTDOWN
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
OUTDOOR AIR CONFIG
OUTDOOR AIR CTRL
OUTDOOR AIR DEADBAND
RETURN AS SPACE
OFF, MANUAL, 2 POSITION, OUTDOOR AIR %,
100% OA (DEFAULT), ANALOG CONTROL, PRESSURE
DEADBAND
RANGE: 0-10°F/0-6°C
DEFAULT: 5°F/3°C
ENABLE
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
OUTDOOR AIR LIMITS
MIN % OCC/UNOCC
MAX % OCC/UNOCC
MIN V OCC/UNOCC
MAX V OCC/UNOCC
RANGE: 0-MAX OA %
DEFAULT: 0%
RANGE: MIN OA-100 %
DEFAULT: 100%
RANGE: 0-MAX OA V
DEFAULT: 0V
RANGE: MIN OA-10 V
DEFAULT: 10 V
72
• Preset OA Values – On/Off option. If set to On, the voltage values equivalent to outdoor air percentage.
• Edit OA% Table – User may edit voltages for an equivalent to outdoor air percent table.
• Economizer Config – Refer to
.
• Economizer Mode – Off, Fixed Dry Bulb, Diff (Differential) Dry Bulb, Fixed Enthalpy, Diff Enthalpy.
•
Disable Cooling
– When the economizer is using an outside air % greater than this setting, mechanical cooling will be disabled.
•
Economizer Act
– Option to set the economizer to activate on cooling only, or cooling and blower.
•
Damper Presets
– This allows the user to set damper preset option On or Off.
•
Occ Damper Presets
– User may set occupied damper speeds. Refer to
.
• Unocc Damper Presets – User may set unoccupied damper speeds.
• Room Override – If set to On, the unit will use the Room
Override SP rather than Discharge SP. This setting should only be used when heat tempering mode is set to “Discharge” and “Activate Based On” is set to “Either.” When the space is calling for heat, it will use the Room Override
SP instead of Discharge SP to heat the space.
•
Exhaust Contactor
– This allows the user to assign a contactor for an interlocked exhaust fan. There is an occupied and unoccupied setting for this.
•
None
• Before Airflow : Exhaust fan will start before the airflow proving switch has been activated.
• After Airflow : Exhaust fan will start after the airflow proving switch has proved there is airflow.
•
Exhaust On Smoke
– Input that when enabled, if it receives a 120V signal from a fire system, will shut down the supply fan and enable the exhaust contactor.
•
Unit Heaters
– On/Off options for Cabinet, Drain, and
Crankcase heaters.
•
Trouble Input
– While connector J28 pin 3 receives 24 volts, the unit will act based on one of the following settings:
•
Unit Off
– Shuts down blower (heating/cooling will also shutdown). Bypass any timers.
•
Both Off
– Turn off/lockout heating and cooling.
Bypass min on/off timers.
•
Heat Off
– Turns off/lockout heating.
•
Cool Off
– Turns off/lockout cooling. Bypass min on/off timers.
•
Set Back
– Forces unit to unoccupied state.
FACTORY SETTINGS
UNIT OPTIONS
OUTDOOR AIR CONFIG
PRESET OA VALUES
EDIT OA% TABLE
ENABLE
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
EDITABLE VALUES IN 1/2 VOLT INCREMENTS (0-10V).
VOLT VALUE CORRELATES TO % VALUE.
ECONOMIZER CONFIG
ECONOMIZER MODE
DISABLE COOLING
OFF (DEFAULT), FIXED DRY BULB,
DIFF DRY BULB, FIXED TOTAL, DIFF TOTAL
AT OA
RANGE: MIN-MAX V or %
DEFAULT: MIN V or %
DAMPER PRESETS
ECONOMIZER ACT
ENABLE
ACT ON
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
COOL & BLOWER(DEFAULT) or COOLING ONLY
OCC DAMPER PRESETS
RANGE: 0-MAX OA V
DEFAULT: 0V
UNOCC DAMPER PRESETS
ROOM OVERRIDE
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
RANGE: MIN OA-10 V
DEFAULT: 10 V
EXHAUST CONTACTOR
EXHAUST ON SMOKE
OCC/UNOCC
ENABLE
NONE (DEFAULT),
BEFORE AIRFLOW, AFTER AIRFLOW
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
UNIT HEATERS
TROUBLE INPUT
CABINET
DRAIN
CRANKCASE
MODE
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
UNIT OFF, BOTH OFF (DEFAULT),
COOL OFF, HEAT OFF, SET BACK
73
• Powered Exhaust – Can be set to operate on Building
PS, 0-10V (external field wiring), or Manual (0-10V board output specified in “User Settings” to exhaust blower).
•
Min/Max Fan Speed
– The powered exhaust should never go below min speed or above max speed.
•
Outdoor Reset
– Allows access to setting option On/Off.
Below are scenarios for Outdoor Reset functionality.
- Discharge Heat Tempering: If outside air is below OA
Reset Low set point, heat will discharge to Reset Heat
Discharge setting.
- Space Heat Tempering: If outside air is below OA
Reset Low set point, space set point will adjust to
Reset Heat Space setting.
•
Dynamic Set Point
– Dynamic functionality:
When heating: If the measured outside air temperature
is below the Dynamic Heat OA set point minus the differential set point, the space or discharge set point will increase/decrease by offset.
When cooling: If the measured outside air temperature is above the Dynamic Cool OA set point plus the differential set point, the space or discharge set point will increase/decrease by offset.
• DD Wheel Size – Wheel size selection. The size selection will be utilized for CFM monitoring.
•
Dehumid Input
– Option associated with units that contain reheat. Set to Off when the unit does not contain reheat, set to On when unit contains reheat.
•
CO2 Control Config
– Monitors CO2 and will adjust blower speed/damper position based on CO2 set point.
•
Override
– The unit will try to maintain space CO2
Parts Per Million (PPM) levels based on min/max threshold set points set by the user. The unit will modulate the blower/damper linearly between their corresponding min/max settings.
•
Threshold
– CO2 Parts Per Million (PPM) maximum threshold set points for the space. When the space
CO2 PPM reading exceeds the threshold setting, the blower/damper will go to their max setting.
• Single Zone VAV – When blower, damper, or both are active, adjustable points can be found in “User Settings.”
•
Blower Speed Heat/Cool
:
- For heating in blower setting, blower to modulate with the discharge temp min discharge, min blower speed.
Max discharge, max blower speed. Scaled linearly between min/max discharge to min/max blower speed.
- For cooling in blower setting, blower speed will change depending on how many cooling stages are active.
Evap counts as 1st stage of cooling.
• Damper Pos Heat/Cool :
- For heating in damper setting, damper to modulate with the discharge temp min discharge, min damper position. Max discharge, max damper speed. Scaled linearly between min/max discharge to min/max damper position.
- For cooling in damper position setting, damper position will change depending on how many cooling stages are active. Evap counts as 1st stage of cooling.
FACTORY SETTINGS
UNIT OPTIONS
POWERED EXHAUST
OUTDOOR RESET
DYNAMIC SET POINT
DD WHEEL SIZE
DEHUMID INPUT
CONTROL
MIN FAN
MAX FAN
ENABLE
ENABLE
SIZE
NONE, BUILDING PS,
0-10V, MANUAL
RANGE: 0-10 V
DEFAULT: 1.5 V
RANGE: 0-10 V
DEFAULT: 10 V
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
ON/OFF
DEFAULT: OFF
11,13, 15, 18, 20, 24, 30, 36,
16Z,18Z, 20Z, 22Z, 25Z, 28Z
ENABLE
REHEAT DEFAULT: ON
NO REHEAT DEFAULT: OFF
CO2 CONTROL CONFIG
SINGLE ZONE VAV
OVERRIDE
THRESHOLD
OFF (DEFAULT),
BLOWER, DAMPER
OFF (DEFAULT),
BLOWER, DAMPER
OFF (DEFAULT), BLOWER,
DAMPER, BOTH
74
Occpd Ovrd (Occupancy Override) Duration – Length of override timer. If override is active, it can be manually stopped by pressing the end override button on the HMI. The default setting is 1 hour but can be adjusted up to 16 hours.
Limit SP (Set Point) Adjust – This allows the user to change the current temperature set point through the home screen.
The range adjustment is 0-100 degrees. Default is 5°F. When the set point is set to 0°F, the adjustment buttons (+/-) will not be visible.
Temp Ovrd Duration
– Length of temperature override timer.
PID Config
– Protected Parameters (DO NOT CHANGE
THESE PARAMETERS)
Sensor Offsets:
•
Dschrg Disp Offset –
Displays offset for discharge temp.
This can be used if actual discharge temperature is measured differently from what is being displayed.
• Space Disp Offset – Displays offset for space temperature. This can be used if actual space temperature is measured differently from what is being displayed.
•
Dschrg RH Offset –
Displays offset for discharge humidity. This can be used if actual discharge humidity is measured differently from what is being displayed.
•
Space RH Offset –
Displays offset for space humidity.
This can be used if actual space humidity is measured differently from what is being displayed.
FACTORY SETTINGS
OCC OVRD DURATION
LIMIT SP ADJUST
TEMP OVRD DURATION
PID CONFIG
SENSOR OFFSETS
DSCHRG DISP
SPACE DISP
DSCHRG RH
SPACE RH
DURATION
LIMIT
DURATION
DO NOT ADJUST
SETTINGS
RANGE: 1-16 H
DEFAULT: 1 H
RANGE: 0-100°F/0-55°C
DEFAULT: 5°F/3°C
RANGE: 1-16 H
DEFAULT: 1 H
RANGE: 0-20°F/0-11°C
DEFAULT: 0°F/0°C
RANGE: 0-20°F/0-11°C
DEFAULT: 0°F/0°C
RANGE: 0-30%
DEFAULT: 0%
RANGE: 0-30%
DEFAULT: 0%
75
SERVICE SETTINGS Service Menu Password = 1234
Temperatures – Display monitoring for temperature values.
RH Values – Display monitoring for various RH values.
Open/Closed Status
– Menu to view the open/closed status of all inputs.
Variable Values
– Allows the user to monitor all of the variable input and output values.
Blower VFD Status
– Live parameter feedback from the supply VFD.
Comp VFD Status
– Live parameter feedback from the compressor VFD.
Refridge Diag
– This allows the user to monitor refrigerant components, pressures, and temperatures.
Outdoor Air Values
– Displays the high/low airflow limits.
The calculated actual outdoor air percentage will also be displayed.
ERV Diagnostics – Displays ERV performance and diagnostic values.
•
Current Performance
– Overview of ERV state, ERV wheel speed, exhaust fan speed, and wheel differential pressure.
•
Temp and RH
– Displays temperature and RH values for every quadrant. Also calculates enthalpy at every point.
•
ERV Pressure
– Real time values for monitoring ERV pressure parameters. Stores based values for pressure faults. These values can be adjusted manually or through the ERV calibration process.
Vapor Pressure
– Displays vapor pressure readings.
ERV Exhaust CFM – Displays measured ERV CFM readings. This readout is only valid for units with direct-drive wheels.
Supply CFM
– Displays measured CFM readings. This readout is only valid for units with direct-drive wheels.
Test Menu
• Test Fans – Off, All, Supply, Exhaust, Powered Exhaust,
Cond Fans.
•
Test Heating
– Contains high and low fire tests.
•
Test Cool/HP
– Test cooling or heat pump system.
Adjustments and parameters can be monitored during testing.
•
Test Analog Heating
– This test will simulate a voltage input from a BMS system. The test will begin at 0 volts.
The up and down buttons allow for modulation of input.
•
Test Analog Cooling
– This test will simulate a voltage input from a BMS system. The test will begin at 0 volts.
The up and down buttons allow for modulation of input.
• Evacuation Mode – Only to be used when working on the cooling system. All refrigeration valves in the circuit will be open during evacuation.
•
Test Stepper Motor
– Displays valve position when testing EEV or Reheat valves.
•
Test ERV
– Manually adjustable values when testing
ERV Exhaust Fan, Wheel, or All.
SERVICE SETTINGS
TEMPERATURES
MONITORING TEMPERATURE
SENSOR READINGS
RH VALUES
HMI (1-5)
CURRENT HMI
HUMIDITY READINGS
OPEN/CLOSED STATUS
INPUTS
OUTPUTS
COMPONENTS INPUT
READINGS
COMPONENTS OUTPUT
READINGS
VARIABLE VALUES
BLOWER VFD STATUS
INPUTS
OUTPUTS
COMPONENTS INPUT
READINGS
COMPONENTS OUTPUT
READINGS
VFD PARAMETER READINGS
COMP VFD STATUS
REFRIDGE DIAG
OUTDOOR AIR VALUES
ERV DIAGNOSTICS
VAPOR PRESSURE
ERV EXHAUST CFM
SUPPLY CFM
VFD PARAMETER READINGS
COMPONENT VALUES OF
REFRIGERANT COMPONENTS
DISPLAYS OUTDOOR
VALUES
MONITORS ERV PERFORMANCE,
TEMP, RH, and PRESSURE VALUES
VAPOR PRESSURE
READINGS
ERV CFM READINGS
INLET PS READINGS
CFM READINGS
INLET PS READINGS
TEST MENU
TEST FANS STATE
STATE
TEST HEATING
TEST COOL/HP STATE
EVACUATION MODE
TEST STEPPER MOTOR
TEST ERV
STATE
STATE
STATE
OFF, ALL, SUPPLY, EXHAUST,
POWERED EXHAUST, COND FANS
OFF, LOW FIRE, FURN1 LOW, FURN2 LOW,
HIGH FIRE, FURN HIGH, FURN2 HIGH, ANALOG
OFF, HP, COOL
OFF/ON
OFF, EEV, REHEAT
OFF, EXH FAN, WHEEL, ALL
76
• Test Options
•
Test Cabinet Heater
– Beginning this test will activate the cabinet heater on.
•
Test Drain Heater
– Beginning this test will activate the drain heater on.
•
Test Crankcase Heater
– Beginning this test will activate the crankcase heater on.
•
Test OA Ctrl
– Beginning this test will create an output to the outdoor air control. The test will begin at 0 volts.
The up and down buttons allow for modulation of the output.
•
Test Freezestat
– Test menu will allow user access to adjust set points to verify freezestat operation in various types of ambient conditions.
Clear Fault History – This will clear the entire fault history.
If there is an active fault when cleared, that fault will show up until it is fixed.
Set Clock
– Set day and time.
Calibrate Static PS – Calibrates pressure sensor. Must disconnect all pressure tubes before calibration.
Calibrate CFM – Calibrates pressure differential in the venturi to calculate approximate fan CFM. Must disconnect all pressure tubes before calibration.
Calibrate ERV
– Calibrates pressure differentials across all filters and energy wheel.
ERV Service Mode
– Allows user to control damper, supply, and exhaust fans.
Update Factory Defaults
– This allows the original factory default settings to be overridden. When confirming the updated settings, these settings will now be used when
“Factory Reset” is needed.
Factory Reset
– Will reset board to factory commissioned settings.
SERVICE SETTINGS
TEST OPTIONS
TEST OPTIONS
CLEAR FAULT HISTORY
SET CLOCK
CALIBRATE STATIC PS
CALIBRATE CFM
CALIBRATE ERV
ERV SERVICE MODE
TEST CABINET HEATER
TEST DRAIN HEATER
TEST CRANKCASE HEAT
TEST OA CTRL
TEST FREEZESTAT
CONFIRM
CURRENT DATE AND TIME
ENTER
ENTER
START
STATE OFF/ON
UPDATE FACTORY DFLTS
FACTORY RESET
CONFIRM
CONFIRM
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
STATE
OFF, CAB HEAT
OFF, DRAIN HEAT
OFF, CRANKCASE HT
OFF, MIXBOX
OFF, FREEZESTAT
77
UNIT OPERATION
WARNING: Gloves and safety glasses must be worn when servicing refrigeration equipment.
Before starting or operating the unit, verify all fasteners are secure and tight. In particular, check the set screw in the wheel hub. Verify power and gas are OFF to the unit. Before connecting the unit to power, turn the fan wheel by hand to verify it is not striking the inlet, or there are any obstructions. Re-center, if necessary.
Special Tools Required for start-up: AC Voltage Meter, Standard Hand Tools, Differential Pressure Gauge,
Thermometer, Tachometer, Amperage Meter, Refrigeration Gauge Set
Start-Up Procedure
1. Check all electrical connections are secure and tight.
2. Inspect the condition of the intake damper and damper linkage, if applicable.
3. Inspect the air-stream for obstructions. Install necessary filters.
4. Verify all drains are connected and routed in the proper positions. For high-efficiency furnaces, verify
the condensate drain is connected. Refer to “Furnace Condensation Drain” on page 17 .
5. Compare the supplied motor voltage with the fan’s nameplate voltage. If this does not match, correct the problem.
6. Check the rotation of the wheel motor. Verify the wheel is moving in the direction of the directional arrow (
). Incorrect rotation will result in poor air performance, motor overloading, and possible damage to the motor. If the motor rotation is incorrect, adjust using the HMI panel. Go to:
Factory Settings > Unit Options > Blower Config > Supply VFD Direction > Forward .
7. When the fan is started, observe the operation and check for any unusual noises.
8. Connect a refrigerant gauge set to the system. Refer to
“Monitoring the A/C System” on page 105 .
Verify the high side and low side pressure readings are equal at the initial connection.
9. Monitor the surface temperature with a thermometer.
10. Start and run the unit for approximately 20 minutes.
11. Monitor the manifold gauge, surface temperature, subcool, and superheat readings:
- Refer to Table 16 on page 120 to convert the pressure gauge readings to temperature.
- The subcool reading should be approximately 10-20°F .
- The superheat reading should be approximately 20°F .
Figure 39 - Direction of Rotation
78
Start-Up Procedure Heating
Furnace Start-Up Summary
1. Open the field-installed manual gas shut-off valve and ensure the On/Off gas control valve knob is set to ‘On.’
2. Check inlets to all firing tubes on the furnace and ensure that they are all clear of foreign debris. Verify that the tubes line up properly with each nozzle of the gas manifold.
3. Start the unit and check the gas supply pressure at the inlet gas gauge, this gauge is upstream of all electronic gas valves. The inlet pressure should be 7 in. - 14 in. wc on natural gas or 11 in. – 14 in. wc on propane gas . If the inlet pressure is too high, install an additional pressure regulator external to the unit.
4. Verify DIP switches are set correctly on the modulating valve (
). Factory setting for DIP
switches is Off. Refer to Table 14
for DIP switch settings.
5. A final gas leak check shall be performed to verify the gas-tightness of the heater’s components and piping under normal operating conditions.
6. At any point during high/low fire burner adjustment, check the characteristics of the flames in every firing tube of the furnace. Non-existence of flame or a lazy flame can be caused by no gas pressure, low gas pressure, a dirty nozzle orifice, or clogged section of exhaust flue.
7. When testing has completed, replace all caps and covers removed during the adjustment procedure.
Control Signal
0-10 V
2-10 V
0-2 mA
4-20 mA
Table 14 - Modulating Valve Dip Switch Settings
SW1 Signal
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
SW2 Offset
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
SW3 Characteristic
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
High Fire Burner Adjustment
1. Set the unit into high fire mode. This is achieved by configuring high fire by going into the HMI’s configuration, refer to
“HMI Configuration Menu Access” on page 56 . Go to:
Service > Test Menu
> Test Gas Heat > Run High Fire Test .
2. After it has been verified that the furnace(s) are lighting off properly, the manifold gas pressure should be adjusted to jobsite conditions. The gas pressure regulator (integral to the On/Off gas control valve, refer to
) is adjusted at the factory for average gas conditions. The gas supplied to the furnace must be in accordance with the input rating on the rating plate. Once the gas pressure is verified, continue to step 3.
3. If the unit is set up for analog control, continue with high fire using the method above or send the unit a
constant 10V DC or 20mA signal. Refer to Table 14
.
- Remove the cover on the modulating valve (
). Read the manifold gas pressure gauge ï€
(0-10 in. wc) located directly on the gas manifold. The pressure should read 3.5 in. wc for natural gas / 10 in. wc for propane.
If the pressure is incorrect, adjust the pressure.
- To adjust the pressure, press button #1 until the LED lights solid red. Release the button. The valve is now in high fire setting mode.
- Buttons #1 and #2 are used to set high fire setting. Press once to step or hold to auto step.
4. If the proper ( in. wc ) gas pressure cannot be achieved by adjusting the modulating gas valve, and it has been verified that the inlet gas pressure is within the acceptable range of 7 - 14 in. wc on natural gas and 11 – 14 in. wc on propane gas , adjust the regulator on the On/Off gas control valve. Use a screwdriver to
turn the inner adjustment screw clockwise to increase the gas pressure, Figure
79
Figure 40 - Modulating Valve and Controls
BUTTON 1 BUTTON 2
LED DISPLAY
DIP SWITCHES
Low-Fire Burner Adjustment
1. Lock the unit into low fire mode. This is achieved by configuring low fire by going into the HMI’s configuration, go to: Service > Test Menu > Test Gas Heat > Run Low Fire Test .
2. Press and hold button #2 on the modulating valve until the LED light blinks red. Release the button.
The valve is now in low fire setting mode.
3. Press button #1 to increase flow or press button #2 to decrease flow.
- The desired pressure reading for natural gas is 0.15 in. wc If this cannot be obtained, set the low fire pressure as low as possible.
- The pressure reading for propane gas should be 0.75 in. wc
4. Save the low fire setting by simultaneously holding down buttons #1 and #2 until the blinking LED turns off. Press the abort button on the HMI to exit low fire mode.
Final Start-Up Procedure
1. With the air and burner systems in full operation and all ductwork attached, measure the system airflow.
2. Once the proper airflow is achieved, measure and record the fan speed with a reliable tachometer.
Caution - Excessive speed will result in motor overloading or bearing failure .
Do not set fan
RPMs higher than specified in the maximum RPM chart .
3. Measure and record the voltage and amperage to the motor and compare with the motor nameplate to determine if the motor is operating under safe load condition.
4. Check for any obstructions, tools, or hardware that may cause damage when unit is in full operation.
5. Make sure all access panels are in place and secure.
80
Sequence of Operation
Operation Summary - Gas Heating
• When there is a call for heat, the main blower is turned “On” and the airflow switch is proven.
• The Flame Safety Controller (FSC-1) sends 120V AC power to the line input of the power vent blower.
• Power vent blower is controlled by pin J17 on the control board. This varies a signal to the power vent blower motor to initiate a 1 min pre-purge at high speed.
• 24V AC signal runs through the safety circuit (Power Vent Airflow Switch/High Temperature Limit/
Flame Roll-out Switch) and into FSC-1.
• FSC-1 initiates Trial for Ignition by sending a signal to the spark igniter to light the furnace and 24V AC power to the On/Off gas valve and a signal to the HMI that it is sparking. This opens the On/Off gas valve and triggers the start of the 17-seconds from the HMI to the powervent blower, and modulating valve.
• Flame is sensed by FSC-1’s remote flame sensor at the firing tube of furnace.
• HMI’s 17-second high-fire off-delay time sequence runs out, and a variable voltage is sent to the power vent blower motor.
• The control board continues to modulate the heat output of the unit by adjusting the 0-10V DC signal to the modulating gas valve.
NOTE: If a high turndown furnace is present, this sequence occurs with FSC-2 if the call for heat dictates a need for a second furnace.
There are different options for controlling the temperature output of these units. These include Discharge
Temperature Control, Space Temperature Control, Analog Control, and Direct Digital Control (DDC).
Discharge Control: When used in discharge control, the MUA board receives a call to heat from the intake sensor, the MUA board will modulate the discharge temperature until it hits the desired set point.
The user can choose whether discharge heating is activated based on intake temperature, space temperature, either, both, or stat.
Space Control: When the space control option has been selected, there may be an HMI (that contains an internal temperature sensor) or a space thermistor. The user can choose whether the space heating is activated based on intake temperature, space temperature, either, both or stat.
Analog Control/Direct Digital Control (DDC) : A 0-10V DC or 0-20mA signal is sent to the MUA board from the building control system to regulate the heating output of the unit.
In all cases, the MUA board controls the amount of gas to the burner based on the signal from the temperature control components. When the modulating gas valve is all the way open, achieving the maximum BTUs and temperature rise of the unit, the unit is in high fire.
81
Flame Safety Control (FSC)
The Flame Safety Control (FSC) is present only to monitor the flame, NOT to control temperature.
The FSC uses a sensor mounted at the intake of the upper-most firing tube of the furnace to sense the existence of a flame. The FSC controls the opening of the solenoid gas valve, and the operation of the spark igniter to initiate a flame upon start-up. When there is a call for heat, the LED on the FSC is energized, indicating that the unit has power. Then, there is a one-minute pre-purge. The power vent blower on the furnace is sent to high speed to exhaust any gas in the Heat-exchanger/Control Cabinet that may be present before trial for ignition. As soon as the pre-purge has initiated, the FSC checks that airflow is sensed by the power vent airflow switch and that the High Limit and Roll-out switches are not tripped.
Upon successful sensing of induced power vent airflow, continuity of temperature limit, and roll-out switches, the FSC initiates a 15-second ignition sequence. During this ignition sequence (
FSC opens the On/Off gas valve and allows gas to pass through to the gas manifold. At the same moment, the spark igniter begins to spark, causing the electrode on the burner to ignite the gas. This results in a flame at the lowest firing tube of the furnace. This immediately ignites the flow of gas in each succeeding firing tube moving vertically until the entire furnace is lit. When the sensor detects the flame at the intake of the uppermost firing tube, the FSC continues to power the On/Off gas valve until there is a loss of flame presence. This is the normal operating mode.
Figure 41 - Ignition Sequence
Interval
Description
Initial Call for Heat
1 Min.
Pre-Purge
15 Sec. Trial for Ignition
1 Min.
Inter-Purge
15 Sec. Trial for Ignition
1 Min.
Inter-Purge
15 Sec. Trial for Ignition
2 Min.
Post-Purge
1 Hr
Lockout
Repeat
Cycle
Time (Min:Sec)
(Non-Linear Scale)
0:00 1:00 1:15 2:15 2:30 3:30 3:45 5:45 End Cycle
Modulating Stage Sequence
The modulating stage operates differently than other On/Off staged furnaces. Instead of being “On” or
“Off,” the gas flow to this furnace is modulated up and down to account for varying calls for heat during the unit’s operating period. In addition, the speed of its power vent blower is varied as the gas flow changes to maintain constant combustion efficiency over the entire firing range.
The modulating furnace power vent blower is controlled by an on-board speed controller, located on the
MUA control board. Voltage to the motor is based on a 0-10V DC signal. The output voltage (True RMS) to the motor varies non-linearly between 120V AC @ 10V DC for high fire and 86.5V AC @ 0V DC for low fire.
MUA Board and High Fire Start
The MUA board compares a difference between two sensor values and set points; or compares a 0-10V
DC or 0-20 mA signal from an analog control to the modulating furnace. The signal is linearized such that input voltage is directly proportional to amount of gas being delivered to the modulating valve.
To ensure proper light-off in all conditions, the MUA board contains software that forces the modulating furnace to light at high-fire when that furnace’s main gas valve is first opened. There is a built-in timer that allows it to send a constant 10V DC signal to the modulating gas valve, and power vent blower speed controller. This will force the furnace into high-fire for a period of 17-seconds after the initial spark is sent by the FSC. After this forced high-fire light-off period has expired, the modulating furnace’s power vent blower and modulating gas valve will receive a modulating signal from the MUA board.
82
Re-Circulating Control Options
The ratio of outdoor to indoor air in the discharge supply air can be adjusted through the MUA board output. The board will output a 0-10V DC signal to command the position of the damper. There are several options for controlling the position of this damper. Use the HMI panel to change options: ï€
Factory Settings > Unit Options > Outdoor Air Config> Outdoor Air Ctrl
Powered Exhaust
The powered exhaust fan is located by the intake damper assembly and is designed to prevent the building from over pressurizing. When there is excessive static in the building’s return ductwork, the powered exhaust fan will assist exhausting air directly outdoors to balance the building’s internal pressure.
The powered exhaust fan will actuate depending on the outdoor air configuration’s settings and supply fan activation.
Outdoor Air Configuration
When Outdoor Air % or Schedule is selected, “Outdoor Air Deadband” will be active. This setting checks the delta T between outdoor and return air. If the difference between these two temperatures is less than or equal to the dead band setting (default setting is 5 degrees), the MUA board will not alter its output to the damper assembly.
Off - Outdoor air control from the control board will not output a signal. May be used when damper is controlled by a photohelic gauge or a Building Management System (BMS).
Manual - The fresh air dampers can be manually controlled from the HMI panel corresponding to a 0-10V
DC output signal from the control board. This output voltage signal can be manually adjusted. This will allow the user to manually set the dampers to match the building ventilation requirements.
2 Position - The fresh air dampers can be controlled by a two-position switch (a field-supplied switching device) to select closed position or 100% open. The control board sends out a constant 10V DC signal to the actuator. The field supplied switch will break or make the signal from the control board to the outdoor air damper. When the switch is used to disconnect power (open the circuit), or if a power failure occurs, or if the control board is shut-off, the return air damper will open by spring return. If using a two-position switch, connect in series to the control board at connection A+ and D+.
Outdoor Air % - The dampers can be controlled from the HMI to position the dampers from 0% to 100% fresh air. The MUA board utilizes an internal algorithm to alter its 0-10V output to the damper assembly to maintain an exact outdoor air percentage.
100% OA - If this damper control is chosen, anytime the blower is running, the damper will be fully open.
The board logic will send 10 volts to open the damper. When there is no call for the blower, the board logic will send 0 volts to close the damper.
Analog Control - When this is set to ON, the damper will modulate linearly between the min and max OA voltage for both occupied and unoccupied modes.
Pressure Control - Damper position will modulate to maintain building pressure. Building pressure below the set point will increase the amount of outdoor air supplied to increase pressure.
NOTE: When Scheduling is enabled, separate occupied and unoccupied set points will be available for outdoor air control settings.
Programmable Thermostat
The programmable thermostat can be set off the discharge sensor set point. This allows the unit to modulate for the programmed space set point. An example would be, if the discharge set point is set for
65°F, and the space calls for heat/cooling cycle, the unit will modulate to meet the discharge set point.
The thermostat can also work off blower mode. This setting will look at the intake air temperature. The unit will modulate to avoid bringing in too hot or too cold of air into the space.
83
Heating, Cooling, Defrost, and Reheat
Figure 42 - Heat Pump with Reheat Option
Outdoor Fan(s)
Supply Fan
Hot Gas Reheat Valve (HG-1)
Discharge Line
Filter/Drier
Liquid Line Pressure
Sensor
Reversing
Valve
High
Refrigeration
Pressure
Switch
Discharge
Pressure
Sensor
Compressor
Electronic
Expansion Valve
Outdoor Coil Accumulator
Indoor Coil Reheat Coil
Low Refrigeration
Pressure Switch
Suction
Line
NOTE: Figure 42 is one example of many configurations offered.
Air velocity should be maintained between 200 and 550 fpm through the indoor coil.
Heating cycle (heat pump)
• In heating mode, the outdoor coil acts as the evaporator coil. When the thermostat calls for a heating sequence, the reversing valve is automatically powered. The compressor and outdoor fan start. The heating system is now in operation. Once the thermostat is satisfied, the system will shut down.
• The compressor pumps out high pressure refrigerant vapor. The vapor leaves the compressor, and then through the energized reversing valve.
• The refrigerant then flows through the indoor coil. Supply air removes heat from the refrigerant vapor, warming the indoor air and heating the building. When enough heat is removed, the vapor condenses into a high pressure liquid. The liquid temperature is slightly warmer than indoor air temperature. The liquid refrigerant then passes through an Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV), reducing its pressure and temperature, then passes through a filter/drier. The filter/drier adsorbs water and filters system contaminants.
• As the cool, low pressure liquid refrigerant enters the outdoor coil, it expands and absorbs heat from the outdoor air passing over the finned surface. Heat from the outdoor air causes the low pressure liquid to evaporate into a cool vapor.
• The cold refrigerant vapor passes through the outdoor vapor line to the reversing valve. The reversing valve directs refrigerant into the accumulator. The accumulator holds a liquid refrigerant and oil mixture, and controls flow back to the compressor. The liquid refrigerant and oil mixture are metered back to the compressor through a small orifice near the bottom of the accumulator.
• The refrigerant vapor passes through the suction line to the intake of the compressor. The cycle then repeats.
84
Cooling cycle
is a basic representation of the cooling cycle.
• When the cooling sequence is initiated, the compressor and outdoor fan start. The cooling system is now in operation. Once the thermostat is satisfied, the system will shut down.
• The compressor pumps out high pressure refrigerant vapor (discharge line). The vapor leaves the compressor. If the unit is a heat pump, the vapor will pass through the de-energized reversing valve.
• The vapor flows through the discharge line to the outdoor coil. Air from the outdoor fan removes heat from the refrigerant vapor. When enough heat is removed, the vapor condenses into a high pressure liquid. The liquid temperature is slightly warmer than ambient air temperature. This warm, high pressure liquid leaves the outdoor coil and flows through the copper refrigerant line. The liquid passes through a filter/drier. The filter/drier adsorbs water and filters system contaminants.
• At the end of the line, the refrigerant passes through an Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV), reducing its pressure and temperature.
• As the liquid, under reduced pressure, enters the indoor coil, it expands and absorbs heat from the indoor air passing over the finned surface. Heat from the indoor air, causes the low pressure liquid to evaporate, and cools the indoor air. The refrigerant is now a cool vapor.
• Refrigerant vapor passes through the insulated vapor line. If the unit is a heat pump, a reversing valve will direct refrigerant into the accumulator. The accumulator controls liquid refrigerant and refrigerant oil flow back to the compressor. Refrigerant vapor passes through the suction line to the compressor.
The cycle then repeats.
Figure 43 - Cooling Cycle
85
Defrost cycle (heat pump)
• In heating mode, the outdoor (condensing) coil acts as the evaporator coil. Moisture from the outside air condenses on the outside coil, and normally runs off. During the colder part of the heating season, this moisture freezes. This frozen moisture blocks air movement through the coil. A defrost cycle needs to be run to remove the frost.
• The defrost control detects the buildup of ice on the outdoor coil. The reversing valve will direct hot gas from the compressor to the outdoor coil. This starts the defrost process.
• The outdoor fan stops to prevent cold air from being passed onto the outdoor coil while hot refrigerant is in the outdoor coil.
• When the defrost control has detected the ice has melted, the defrost mode will end. The reversing valve shifts to the heating position. Hot refrigerant gas is then sent to the indoor coil. The outdoor fan operates, and the unit is now in normal heating mode.
Reheat cycle (cooling only)
• During the reheat cycle, a portion of the hot gas from the compressor enters the reheat coil and then is fed into the discharge line to the outdoor coil.
• The air is cooled and dehumidified as it flows across the indoor coil. It is then reheated by the reheat coil to lower the relative humidity.
Reversing valve for heating/cooling (heat pump)
When the unit is set up to run as a heat pump, the reversing valve is activated before the compressor
starts. The reversing valve will de-energize if there is a call for cooling. Refer to Figure 44
for details.
• When the internal valve is de-energized (down), the unit will be in cooling mode.
• When the internal valve is energized (up), the unit will be in heating mode.
Figure 44 - Reversing Valve
Discharge
Connection
Outdoor Coil
Connection
Suction
Connection
Indoor Coil
Connection
86
Economizer
Economizer type sets the type of economizer logic that will be used. This feature will control the economizer using a 0-10V DC signal output on the MUA board. The table below shows option selections and definitions.
Use the HMI to select Economizer type. Go to Factory Settings > Unit Options > Outdoor Air Config >
Economizer .
Table 15 - Economizer Options
Option
Fixed Dry Bulb
Differential Dry Bulb
Fixed Total
Differential Total
Definition
The economizer will modulate open if the outdoor air temperature is less than the economizer temperature set point. The modulation occurs from the current damper position to fully open over a specific temperature range (determined by the economizer temperature band value).
The economizer will modulate open if the outdoor air temperature is less than the return air temperature. The modulation occurs from the current damper position to fully open over a specific temperature range (determined by the economizer temperature band value).
The economizer will modulate open from the current position if the outdoor air dew point temperature is less than the economizer dew point set point, and the outdoor dry bulb temperature is less than the economizer temperature set point. The dew point set point is calculated using the economizer temperature and humidity set points. The modulation occurs from the current damper position to fully open over a specific dew point temperature band.
The economizer will modulate open from the current position if the outdoor air wet bulb temperature is less than the economizer dew point set point, and the outdoor dry bulb temperature is less than the economizer temperature set point. If the return dew point is less than the dew point set point, the unit will use the return dew point as the beginning of the modulation band. The modulation occurs from the current damper position to fully open over a specific dew point temperature band.
Disable Cooling
This allows the user to set the Outdoor Air (OA) percentage
through the damper assembly ( Figure 45
) when mechanical cooling is disabled.
Refer to
“Psychrometric Chart” on page 88
for economizer operation and logic.
Figure 45 - Damper Assembly
87
Psychrometric Chart
Fixed Dry Bulb Economizer
55 60
Psychrometric Chart
Normal Temperature
I-P Units
Sea Level
Barometric Pressure: 29.921 Inches of HG
Set Point Temp
Economizer Band
Low Limit Temp
25
30
75
35
ENTHALPY - BTU PER POUND OF DRY AIR
AT
ION TEMPERATURE - °F
SATUR
70
65
40
45
70
50
80
85
75
80
90
85 WET BULB TEMPERATURE - °F
14.5
15.0
10
25
20
20
15
30
25
45
40
35
35
30
12.5
MAX OA
40
50
45
55
50
60
90%
80%
60
55
70%
60%
50%
13.5
65
13.0
40%
30%
20%
10% RELATIVE HUMIDITY
20 25 30 35 40 45 50
10
Differential Dry Bulb Economizer
55 60 65 70 75
100% 50%
15
Outdoor Air
0%
80
14.0
SPEC
IFIC VOLUME ft³/lb OF D
RY A
R
MIN OA
85 90 95 100
DRY BULB TEMPERATURE - °F
20
ENTHALPY - BTU PER POUND OF DRY AIR
105 110 115
25
Psychrometric Chart
Normal Temperature
I-P Units
Sea Level
Barometric Pressure: 29.921 Inches of HG
Set Point Temp
Economizer Band
Low Limit Temp
Return Temp
20
10
25
20
25
15
30
25
30 35 40
25
45
40
45
30
75
35
ENTHALPY - BTU PER POUND OF DRY AIR
AT
ION TEMPERATURE - °F
SATUR
70
65
65
20
50
55
45
40
35
40
35
30
12.5
MAX OA
45
13.0
50
60
90%
80%
60
55
70%
60%
50%
40%
13.5
30%
20%
10% RELATIVE HUMIDITY
50
10
55 60
100%
65
50%
70
0%
15
Outdoor Air
75
80
70
50
80
85
75
55 60
14.0
SPEC
80
IFIC VOLUME ft³/lb OF D
RY A
R
90
85 WET BULB TEMPERATURE - °F
14.5
MIN OA
15.0
85 90 95 100
DRY BULB TEMPERATURE - °F
20
ENTHALPY - BTU PER POUND OF DRY AIR
105 110
25
115 120
90
80
110
100
140
130
120
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
210
200
190
180
170
160
150
1.3
85
1.2
80
75
70
1.1
1
.9
.8
.7
65
60
55
50
65
.6
45
60
.5
55
.4
50
45
40
35
30
25
20
10
0
-20
.3
.2
.1
40
35
30
30
120
150
140
130
120
110
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
210
200
190
180
170
160
1.3
85
1.2
80
75
70
65
1.1
1
.9
.8
.7
.6
60
.5
55
.4
50
45
40
35
30
25
20
10
0
-20
.3
.2
.1
65
60
55
50
45
40
35
88
Fixed Total Economizer
Psychrometric Chart
Normal Temperature
I-P Units
Sea Level
Barometric Pressure: 29.921 Inches of HG
Set Point Temp
Economizer Band
Low Limit DP
Set Point %RH
High Limit DP
25
30
75
35
ENTHALPY - BTU PER POUND OF DRY AIR
AT
ION TEMPERATURE - °F
SATUR
70
65
40
45
Outdoor Air
15
20
20
10
35
30
25
20
30
25 12.5
MAX OA
35
25 30 35 40
0%
50%
45
40
50
45
55
50
60
90%
80% 60
55
70%
60%
50%
40%
13.5
13.0
30%
20%
10% RELATIVE HUMIDITY
45 50 55 60 65 70 75
10 15
80
70
50
55 60
85
75
14.0
SPEC
80
IFIC VOLUME ft³/lb OF D
RY A
R
90
85 WET BULB TEMPERATURE - °F
14.5
MIN OA
15.0
80 85 90 95 100
DRY BULB TEMPERATURE - °F
20
ENTHALPY - BTU PER POUND OF DRY AIR
105 110 115
25
120
30
20
10
60
50
40
80
70
210
200
1.3
190
180
170
85
1.2
1.1
110
100
90
160
150
140
80
130
120
75
70
1
.9
.8
65
.7
.6
60
.5
55
.4
50
45
40
35
30
25
20
10
0
-20
.3
.2
.1
65
60
55
50
45
40
35
30
Differential Total Economizer
Psychrometric Chart
Normal Temperature
I-P Units
Sea Level
Barometric Pressure: 29.921 Inches of HG
Set Point Temp
Economizer Band
Low Limit DP
Set Point %RH
High Limit DP
Return DP
25
30
75
35
ENTHALPY - BTU PER POUND OF DRY AIR
AT
ION TEMPERATURE - °F
SATUR 70
65
40
45
20
Outdoor Air
0%
15
50%
100%
40
10 35
30
20
25
30
25 12.5
MAX OA
35
45
40
20 25 30 35 40 45
50
45
55
13.0
50
60
90%
80% 60
55
70%
60% 13.5
50%
40%
30%
20%
10% RELATIVE HUMIDITY
50 55 60 65 70 75
10 15
80
70
50
80
85
75
55 60
14.0
SPEC
80
IFIC VOLUME ft³/lb OF D
RY A
R
90
85 WET BULB TEMPERATURE - °F
14.5
MIN OA
15.0
85 90 95 100
DRY BULB TEMPERATURE - °F
20
ENTHALPY - BTU PER POUND OF DRY AIR
105 110
25
115 120
180
170
160
150
140
210
200
190
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
130
120
110
100
1.3
85
1.2
80
75
70
65
1.1
1
.9
.8
.7
.6
60
.5
55
.4
50
45
40
35
30
25
20
10
0
-20
.3
.2
.1
65
60
55
50
45
40
35
30
89
Energy Recovery (Optional)
The Energy Recovery (Enthalpy) Wheel is assembled and installed from the factory. Minimal maintenance will provide years of trouble-free service.
If the unit is equipped with the optional enthalpy wheel, energy recovery is provided by pulling outside air across half of the wheel and moving exhaust air across the other half. Latent heat and sensible heat are moved from the hotter and moist exhaust air to the colder and dry outside air during winter conditions.
Latent heat and sensible heat are transferred from the hotter and moist outside air to the cooler and dry exhaust air during summer conditions. Enthalpy control comprises of starting and stopping the exhaust fan, modulating the speed of the exhaust fan, starting and stopping the enthalpy wheel, and optionally controlling the speed of the enthalpy wheel. If required by outdoor air conditions, the outdoor damper is controlled in the normal manner.
Figure 46 provides details for components associated with the enthalpy
wheel.
Figure 46 - Energy Recovery Wheel Overview
1. Outdoor Air Filtration
2. Energy Wheel
3. ERV Controls
4. Return/Exhaust Filtration
5. ECM Exhaust Fan
Outdoor Air
1
2
3
Supply Air
Purge
5
Exhaust Air
4
Return Air
Purge and Pressurization
Pressurization is critical to minimize crossover from exhaust to supply and to allow the purge to operate
properly. Move the adjustable purge plate ( Figure 47 ) up to increase purge and minimize crossover.
Figure 47 - Purge Details
Adjustable purge plate.
90
Drive Motor
The enthalpy wheel comes standard with a variable speed drive motor, which is pre-wired to turn in the proper direction. The motor can adjust speed to lower the enthalpy’s wheel capacity during frosting conditions. This lowered capacity allows the wheel to recover energy still while preventing frosting. During non-frosting conditions, the modulation of the wheel allows enhanced capacity control of wheel for greater turn-down and more precise discharge control.
Frost Protection (Optional)
illustrates frost prevention conditions. During extremely cold winter conditions, the wheel can frost overdue to the moisture content of the return/exhaust air. A frozen wheel will increase static pressure and reduce efficiency of the wheel. If the wheel fully freezes, the host unit can be starved of supply air. To avoid this situation, the recovery wheel comes standard with a variable speed motor that modulates down during frosting conditions.
Figure 48 - Frost Prevention Psychrometric Chart
Saturated
Air
Saturated
Temperature
Frost
Conditions
No Frost
Conditions
Humidity
Ratio
Saturated
Air
Dry Bulb
Variable Speed Frost Prevention
When there is a threat of frost on the enthalpy wheel, the wheel is slowed down so that less enthalpy transfer occurs, and frosting of the wheel is avoided. Frosting can occur on the enthalpy wheel when the exhaust air leaving the wheel is saturated. This condition occurs when the energy transfer and saturated air lines intersect on a psychrometric chart, and it does not occur when these two lines do not intersect.
Energy Recovery Exhaust Hoods
Units with the optional energy recovery module have an exhaust hood. Each hood is factory installed over the barometric relief, allowing the unit to function in adverse weather without the risk of water/debris infiltration.
Exhaust Fan
Unit utilizes an integral ECM exhaust fan that features various control modes to optimize energy transfer and ensure proper air movement. Exhaust cabinet features barometric relief that seals when the exhaust fan is not powered. This will allow for return air to be utilized when the ERV is off.
Slide-Out Wheel
The wheel can be pulled out to facilitate cleaning and servicing. Power wires for the wheel will need to be unfastened from the lid of the module to allow the full range of motion necessary to service the wheel.
91
Field Installation of Large ERVs
Due to their larger size, some ERVs are shipped loose and must be mounted and wired in the field. This section
cover the install and wiring process for large ERVs. These larger
ERVs will have hardware bags and gasket rolls placed inside before shipping. Such units should have the gasket
applied to the mating side as shown in Figure 49 .
If the unit is not gasketed already, add gasketing to the marked lines on the mounting side of the ERV before installation (
between the strips.
Figure 49 - ERV Gasket Outline
Next, align the ERV with the DOAS unit. Ensure that the marked brackets (
) are aligned and pushed as close together as possible.
Figure 50 - ERV Mating Profile
Control Side Brackets
Blower Side Brackets
92
After the units are positioned correctly, push the bolts through the aligned holes on the side mounting brackets and hand tighten the nuts on the other side. BOTH SIDES MUST HAVE THE BOLTS INTALLED AND HAND
TIGHTENED.
Working around the unit (from side to side), uniformly tighten the bolts to bring the modules together. Ensure the gasket between the two mating surfaces are compressed. FAILURE TO DO SO CAN RESULT IN POOR
SEALING AND WARPED METAL ON THE UNIT.
Once the ERV has been mounted tight against the DOAS, place the top mating bracket over the exposed raised flange on the ERV lid (
Figure 51 ). Liberally apply silicone to all points of contact between the mating bracket and
lids. Rivet the mating bracket to the raised flange of the ERV lid. Use 1-1/2” (max) rubber-washer self-tapping screws to attach to the lid of the DOAS.
Figure 51 - ERV Top Lid
With the ERV fully attached, the power and communication wires must be connected (
MAKE SURE
THE UNIT HAS NO POWER TO ITS MAIN DISCONNECT BEFORE CONTINUING .
The ERV will have junction boxes in the lower right of the module relative to the control panel. The largest junction box will have a set of terminal blocks for incoming power. Two cable bundles that require field wiring will be spooled and stored in the return opening of the DOAS. The larger junction box will have terminal blocks for incoming power for the ERV module. The smaller junction box will have a CAT5 cable with a coupler. Connect the supplied CAT5 cable from the DOAS to the coupler. With this done, restore power to the DOAS and verify the ERV powers up and can communicate with the main board in the DOAS unit.
Figure 52 - ERV Electrical Connections
Power Connection Factory Wired Communication Connection Factory Wired
Power Connection Field Wired
93
Communication Connection Field Wired
Network
NOTE: The board will reboot when altering certain factory settings.
Communication Module (Optional)
The Communication Module, PN: SCADA , is included in all CASlink equipped panels. It obtains operational data from various connected components. This communication wiring is either RS-485 shielded twisted pair wiring or RJ45 Cat 5 Ethernet wiring.
BACnet
BACnet IP or BACnet MS/TP (
) compatibility can be implemented with this package through a
Protocessor, which is a BTL listed embedded Gateway configured to give a Building Management System access to monitor and/or control a list of BACnet objects. The Protocessor is mounted and factory prewired inside the Electrical Control Panel (ECP). Field connections to the Building Management System
(BMS) are shown on wiring schematics.
The Protocessor is preconfigured at the factory to use the field protocol of the Building Management
System in the specific jobsite. BACnet objects can only be accessed through the specified port and protocol.
Figure 53 - BACnet
5
1
2
3
1. Status LEDs
• Green - Data Out
• Yellow - Data In
• Red - Power On
2. Power Supply 24V AC/DC
4
3. Cat 5 Cable to MUA Board.
4. Field RS485 Connection for BACnet MS/TP
5. Field Ethernet Connection for BACnet IP
94
Device Instance, MAC Address, Baud Rate
Some applications may require that the Protocessor have a specific Device Instance, the default device instance is 50,000. To change the Device Instance, you must access the Web Configurator by connecting a computer to the Ethernet port of the Protocessor. The computer used must be assigned a static IP address of 192.168.1.xxx and a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0.
To access the Web Configurator, type the IP address of the Protocessor in the URL of any web browser.
The default IP address of the Protocessor is 192.168.1.24. Once the landing page has loaded, if required, log in using “admin” for the username and password. If the default “admin” password does not work, the gateway should have a printed password on the module’s Ethernet port.
Go to the main configuration page, select “Configure” from the left-hand menu. Select “Profile
Configuration,” the following window shown in Figure 54
should appear.
The MAC address and Baud Rate, used by BACnet MTSP, are editable. The MAC address default is 127, and the Baud Rate default is 38400.
If any changes are made, click on the submit button for each individual change.
Each individual change will require the system to restart.
Figure 54 - Configuration Parameters Page
95
Changing the IP Address
Some BACnet IP applications may require changing the IP address of the Protocessor. To change the IP address, go to the internal server by typing the default IP address of the Protocessor, 192.168.1.24, in the
URL field of any web browser. The computer used must have a static IP address of 192.168.1.xxx. The
appears. Click on the “Diagnostics and Debugging” button in the lower right corner.
Click on “Setup” from the left-hand side menu and select “Network Settings.” The window shown in ï€
will appear. You can now modify the IP address to whatever is required in the application. Once the IP address has been modified, click on “Update IP Settings.”
Figure 55 - Network Settings Page
96
LonWorks
LonWorks compatibility ( Figure 56 ) can be implemented on control packages through the ProtoNode, a
LonMark certified external Gateway configured to give a Building Management System access to monitor and/or control a list of Network Variables. The ProtoNode is mounted and factory pre-wired inside the
Electrical Control Panel. Refer to schematics connections to the Building Management System are shown.
Figure 56 - LonWorks
Commissioning on a LonWorks Network
During the commissioning process by the LonWorks administrator (using a LonWorks Network
Management Tool), the user will be prompted to hit the Service Pin in the ProtoNode. This pin is located in the front face, and it can be pressed by inserting a small screwdriver and tilting it towards the LonWorks
Port. Refer to Figure 57 for location of the “Service Pin.”
If an XIF file is required, it can be obtained by following these steps:
1. Set your computer’s static IP address to 192.168.1.xxx with a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0.
2. Run a Cat 5 connection from the ProtoNode’s Ethernet port to your computer.
3. On any web browser’s URL field, type 192.168.1.24/fserver.xif.
The web browser should automatically download the fserver.xif file or let you save it on your computer.
Save it as fserver.xif.
Figure 57 - LonWorks Service Pin
SE
RVI
CE PIN
NOTE : Insert Small Screwdriver.
Tilt Toward LonWorks Port To
Activate Service Pin.
A0
A1
A2
97
DDC Control Points (BACnet)
Refer to
“DDC Notes” on page 102 for more information.
Name
DDCHeatCommand (1)
DDCCoolCommand (1)
DDCBlowerCommand (1)
2
3
ID
1
Object Type
Binary Value (BV)
BV
BV
Lon SNVT NAME nviDDCHeat/nvoDDCHeat nviDDCCool1/nvoDDCCool nviDDCBlow/nvoDDCBlow
Function
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
DDCModulation (1) 4 Analog Value (AV) nviDDCModHeat/nvoDDCModHeat Control/Monitor
DDCOccupiedOverride (4)
IntakeHeatOccSP (3)
IntakeHeatUnoccSP (3)
SpaceHeatOccSP (3)
SpaceHeatUnoccSP (3)
MinDischargeHeatOccSP (3)
MinDischargeHeatUnoccSP (3)
DischargeHeatOccSP (3)
DischargeHeatUnoccSP (3)
MaxDischargeHeatOccSP (3)
MaxDischargeHeatUnoccSP (3)
IntakeCoolOccSP (3)
IntakeCoolUnoccSP (3)
SpaceCoolOccSP (3)
SpaceCoolUnoccSP (3)
MinDischargeCoolOccSP (3)
14
15
16
17
18
19
9
10
11
12
13
7
8
5
6
20
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
BV
AV
AV
AV
AV nviDDCOccOvrrd/nvoDDCOccOvrrd nviInHeatOccSP/nvoInHeatOccSP nviInHeatUnocSP/nvoInHeatUnocSP nviSpHeatOccSP/nvoSpHeatOccSP nviSpHeatUnocSP/nvoSpHeatUnocSP nviMinDHeatOccSP/nvoMinDHeatOccSP nviMinDHeatUnoSP/nvoMinDHeatUnoSP nviDisHeatOccSP/nvoDisHeatOccSP nviDisHeatUnocSP/nvoDisHeatUnocSP nviMaxDHeatOccSP/nvoMaxDHeatOccSP nviMaxDHeatUnoSP/nvoMaxDHeatUnoSP nviInCoolOccSP/nvoInCoolOccSP nviInCoolUnocSP/nvoInCoolUnocSP nviSpCoolOccSP/nvoSpCoolOccSP nviSpCoolUnocSP/nvoSpCoolUnocSP nviMinDCoolOccSP/nvoMinDCoolOccSP
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
21
22
23
24
25
55
56
57
58
50
51
52
53
54
59
60
46
47
48
49
41
42
43
44
45
37
38
39
40
32
33
34
35
36
26
27
28
29
30
31
MinDischargeCoolUnoccSP (3)
DischargeCoolOccSP (3)
DischargeCoolUnoccSP (3)
MaxDischargeCoolOccSP (3)
MaxDischargeCoolUnoccSP (3)
RoomOverrideOccSP (3)
RoomOverrideUnoccSP (3)
FirestatIntakeSP (3)
FirestatDischargeSP (3)
FreezestatSP (3)
OverheatDischargeSP (3)
CabinetHeatSP (3)
FurnaceDrainHeatSP (3)
IntakeRhOccSP (3)
IntakeRhUnoccSP (3)
SpaceRhOccSP (3)
SpaceRhUnoccSP (3)
DischargeRhOccSP (3)
DischargeRhUnoccSP (3)
IntakeDpOccSP (3)
IntakeDpUnoccSP (3)
SpaceDpOccSP (3)
SpaceDpUnoccSP (3)
DischargeDpOccSP (3)
DischargeDpUnoccSP (3)
ScheduleSundayAStart (4)
ScheduleSundayAEnd (4)
ScheduleSundayBStart (4)
ScheduleSundayBEnd (4)
ScheduleSundayCStart (4)
ScheduleSundayCEnd (4)
ScheduleMondayAStart (4)
ScheduleMondayAEnd (4)
ScheduleMondayBStart (4)
ScheduleMondayBEnd (4)
ScheduleMondayCStart (4)
ScheduleMondayCEnd (4)
ScheduleTuesdayAStart (4)
ScheduleTuesdayAEnd (4)
ScheduleTuesdayBStart (4)
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV nviMinDCoolUnoSP/nvoMinDCoolUnoSP nviDisCoolOccSP/nvoDisCoolOccSP nviDisCoolUnocSP/nvoDisCoolUnocSP nviMaxDCoolOccSP/nvoMaxDCoolOccSP nviMaxDCoolUnoSP/nvoMaxDCoolUnoSP nviRoomOvOccSP/nvoRoomOvOccSP nviRoomOvUnocSP/nvoRoomOvUnocSP nviFireIntakeSP/nvoFireIntakeSP nviFireDischSP/nvoFireDischSP nviFreezeSP/nvoFreezeSP nviOheatDisSP/nvoOheatDisSP nviCabHeatSP/nvoCabHeatSP nviFDrainHeatSP/nvoFDrainHeatSP nviInRhOccSP/nvoInRhOccSP nviInRhUnoccSP/nvoInRhUnoccSP nviSpRhOccSP/nvoSpRhOccSP nviSpRhUnoccSP/nvoSpRhUnoccSP nviDisRhOccSP/nvoDisRhOccSP nviDisRhUnoccSP/nvoDisRhUnoccSP nviInDpOccSP/nvoInDpOccSP nviInDpUnoccSP/nvoInDpUnoccSP nviSpDpOccSP/nvoSpDpOccSP nviSpDpUnoccSP/nvoSpDpUnoccSP nviDisDpOccSP/nvoDisDpOccSP nviDisDpUnoccSP/nvoDisDpUnoccSP nviSundayAStart/nvoSundayAStart nviSundayAEnd/nvoSundayAEnd nviSundayBStart/nvoSundayBStart nviSundayBEnd/nvoSundayBEnd nviSundayCStart/nvoSundayCStart nviSundayCEnd/nvoSundayCEnd nviMondayAStart/nvoMondayAStart nviMondayAEnd/nvoMondayAEnd nviMondayBStart/nvoMondayBStart nviMondayBEnd/nvoMondayBEnd nviMondayCStart/nvoMondayCStart nviMondayCEnd/nvoMondayCEnd nviTuesdayAStart/nvoTuesdayAStart nviTuesdayAEnd/nvoTuesdayAEnd nviTuesdayBStart/nvoTuesdayBStart
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
98
Modbus
10000
10001
10004
10005
16005
16006
16007
16008
16009
16010
16011
16012
16013
10006
16000
16001
16002
16003
16004
16014
16015
16016
16017
16018
16019
16020
16021
16041
16042
16043
16044
16045
16046
16047
16048
16049
16050
16051
16052
16053
16054
16031
16032
16033
16034
16035
16036
16037
16038
16039
16040
16022
16023
16024
16025
16026
16027
16028
16029
16030
Description
Heating command. Requires heat tempering mode = DDC
Cooling command. Requires heat tempering mode = DDC
Blower command. Requires both heat and cool tempering mode = DDC
Heat modulation signal, 0-10V. 0V = low fire and 10V = high fire.
Requires heat tempering mode = DDC
Occupied override command, requires SchedulingEnabled = ON (1)
Intake Heating Occupied Setpoint
Intake Heating Unoccupied Setpoint
Space Heating Occupied Setpoint
Space Heating Unoccupied Setpoint
Min Discharge Heating when occupied, relevant only if heat tempering mode = space
Min Discharge Heating when unoccupied, relevant only if heat tempering mode = space
Discharge heating setpoint when occupied, requires heat tempering mode = discharge
Discharge heating setpoint when unoccupied, requires heat tempering mode = discharge
Max Discharge Heating when occupied, relevant only if heat tempering mode = space
Max Discharge Heating when unoccupied, relevant only if heat tempering mode = space
Intake Cooling Occupied Setpoint
Intake Cooling Unoccupied Setpoint
Space Cooling Occupied Setpoint
Space Cooling Unoccupied Setpoint
Min Discharge Cooling setpoint when occupied, relevant only if cool tempering mode = space
Min Discharge Cooling setpoint when unoccupied, relevant only if cool tempering mode = space
Discharge Cooling setpoint when occupied, relevant only if cool tempering mode = discharge
Discharge Cooling setpoint when unoccupied, relevant only if cool tempering mode = discharge
Max Discharge Cooling setpoint when occupied, relevant only if cool tempering mode = space
Max Discharge Cooling setpoint when unoccupied, relevant only if cool tempering mode = space
Room Override Occupied Setpoint
Room Override Unoccupied Setpoint
Firestat Intake Setpoint
Firestat Discharge Setpoint
Freezestat Setpoint
Overheat Discharge Setpoint
Cabinet Heat Setpoint
Furnace Drain Heat Setpoint
Intake Relative Humidity Occupied Setpoint
Intake Relative Humidity Unoccupied Setpoint
Space Relative Humidity Occupied Setpoint
Space Relative Humidity Unoccupied Setpoint
Discharge Relative Humidity Occupied Setpoint
Discharge Relative Humidity Unoccupied Setpoint
Intake Dewpoint Occupied Setpoint
Intake Dewpoint Unoccupied Setpoint
Space Dewpoint Occupied Setpoint
Space Dewpoint Unoccupied Setpoint
Discharge Dewpoint Occupied Setpoint
Discharge Dewpoint Unoccupied Setpoint
Daily schedule start/end time in minutes
Daily schedule start/end time in minutes
Daily schedule start/end time in minutes
Daily schedule start/end time in minutes
Daily schedule start/end time in minutes
Daily schedule start/end time in minutes
Daily schedule start/end time in minutes
Daily schedule start/end time in minutes
Daily schedule start/end time in minutes
Daily schedule start/end time in minutes
Daily schedule start/end time in minutes
Daily schedule start/end time in minutes
Daily schedule start/end time in minutes
Daily schedule start/end time in minutes
Daily schedule start/end time in minutes
93
115
116
117
118
110
111
112
113
114
119
120
121
122
106
107
108
109
101
102
103
104
105
97
98
99
100
94
95
96
86
87
88
89
90
91
82
83
84
85
77
78
79
80
81
73
74
75
76
68
69
70
71
72
64
65
66
67
ID
61
62
63
92
MixingBoxManualOAUnocc (2)
EconomizerTempSPOcc (2)
EconomizerTempSPUnocc (2)
EconomizerTempBandOcc (2)
EconomizerTempBandUnocc (2)
EconomizerTotalBandOcc (2)
EconomizerTotalBandUnocc (2)
EconomizerRhSPOcc (2)
EconomizerRhSPUnocc (2)
MixingBoxManualVoltsOcc (2)
MixingBoxManualVoltsUnocc (2)
BlowerPsSpLowOcc (2)
BlowerPsSpLowUnocc (2)
BlowerPsSpHighOcc (2)
BlowerPsSpHighUnocc (2)
DryModeDischTempSPOcc (3)
DryModeDischTempSPUnocc (3)
OaResetLowTempSp (3)
OaResetHighTempSp (3)
OaResetHeatDischTempSp (3)
OaResetCoolDischTempSp (3)
OaResetHeatSpaceTempSp (3)
OaResetCoolSpaceTempSp (3)
CO2SensorPpmMin (5)
CO2SensorPpmMax (5)
CO2ThresholdLimitOcc (5)
CO2ThresholdLimitUnocc (5)
DynamicSpDiff (3)
DynamicSpOffset (3)
DynamicSpHeatOa (3)
Name
ScheduleTuesdayBEnd (4)
ScheduleTuesdayCStart (4)
ScheduleTuesdayCEnd (4)
ScheduleWednesdayAStart (4)
ScheduleWednesdayAEnd (4)
ScheduleWednesdayBStart (4)
ScheduleWednesdayBEnd (4)
ScheduleWednesdayCStart (4)
ScheduleWednesdayCEnd (4)
ScheduleThursdayAStart (4)
ScheduleThursdayAEnd (4)
ScheduleThursdayBStart (4)
ScheduleThursdayBEnd (4)
ScheduleThursdayCStart (4)
ScheduleThursdayCEnd (4)
ScheduleFridayAStart (4)
ScheduleFridayAEnd (4)
ScheduleFridayBStart (4)
ScheduleFridayBEnd (4)
ScheduleFridayCStart (4)
ScheduleFridayCEnd (4)
ScheduleSaturdayAStart (4)
ScheduleSaturdayAEnd (4)
ScheduleSaturdayBStart (4)
ScheduleSaturdayBEnd (4)
ScheduleSaturdayCStart (4)
ScheduleSaturdayCEnd (4)
BlowerManualFreqOcc (2)
BlowerManualFreqUnocc (2)
BlowerManualPwmRateOcc (2)
BlowerManualPwmRateUnocc (2)
MixingBoxManualOAOcc (2)
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
Object Type
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Function
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Lon SNVT NAME nviTuesdayBEnd/nvoTuesdayBEnd nviTuesdayCStart/nvoTuesdayCStart nviTuesdayCEnd/nvoTuesdayCEnd nviWedAStart/nvoWedAStart nviWedAEnd/nvoWedAEnd nviWedBStart/nvoWedBStart nviWedBEnd/nvoWedBEnd nviWedCStart/nvoWedCStart nviWedCEnd/nvoWedCEnd nviThursAStart/nvoThursAStart nviThursAEnd/nvoThursAEnd nviThursBStart/nvoThursBStart nviThursBEnd/nvoThursBEnd nviThursCStart/nvoThursCStart nviThursCEnd/nvoThursCEnd nviFridayAStart/nvoFridayAStart nviFridayAEnd/nvoFridayAEnd nviFridayBStart/nvoFridayBStart nviFridayBEnd/nvoFridayBEnd nviFridayCStart/nvoFridayCStart nviFridayCEnd/nvoFridayCEnd nviSatAStart/nvoSatAStart nviSatAEnd/nvoSatAEnd nviSatBStart/nvoSatBStart nviSatBEnd/nvoSatBEnd nviSatCStart/nvoSatCStart nviSatCEnd/nvoSatCEnd nviBlowManFreqOc/nvoBlowManFreqOc nviBlowManFreqUn/nvoBlowManFreqUn nviBlowManPwmOc/nvoBlowManPwmOc nviBlowManPwmUn/nvoBlowManPwmUn nviMixBoxManOAOc/nvoMixBoxManOAOc nviMixBoxManOAUn/nvoMixBoxManOAUn nviEcoTempSPOcc/nvoEcoTempSPOcc nviEcoTemSPUnocc/nvoEcoTemSPUnocc nviEcoTemBandOcc/nvoEcoTemBandOcc nviEcoTempBUnocc/nvoEcoTempBUnocc nviEcoTotBandOcc/nvoEcoTotBandOcc nviEcoTotBUnocc/nvoEcoTotBUnocc nviEcoRhSPOcc/nvoEcoRhSPOcc nviEcoRhSPUnocc/nvoEcoRhSPUnocc nviMixBoxManVOc/nvoMixBoxManVOc nviMixBoxManVUn/nvoMixBoxManVUn nviBlowPsSpLOcc/nvoBlowPsSpLOcc nviBlowPsSpLUn/nvoBlowPsSpLUn nviBlowPsSpHOcc/nvoBlowPsSpHOcc nviBlowPsSpHUn/nvoBlowPsSpHUn nviDMDisTSPOcc/nvoDMDisTSPOcc nviDMDisTSPUn/nvoDMDisTSPUn nviOaRLTempSp/nvoOaRLTempSp nviOaRHTempSp/nvoOaRHTempSp nviOaRHeatDTSp/nvoOaRHeatDTSp nviOaRCoolDTSp/nvoOaRCoolDTSp nviOaRHeatSTSp/nvoOaRHeatSTSp nviOaRCoolSTSp/nvoOaRCoolSTSp nviCo2PpmMin/nvoCo2PpmMin nviCo2PpmMax/nvoCo2PpmMax nviCO2LimitOcc/nvoCO2LimitOcc nviCO2LimitUn/nvoCO2LimitUn nviDynSpDiff/nvoDynSpDiff nviDynSpOffset/nvoDynSpOffset nviDynSpHeatOa/nvoDynSpHeatOa
16088
16102
16106
16107
16108
16109
16110
16111
16112
16113
16095
16096
16097
16098
16099
16100
16101
16114
16115
16116
16136
16119
16118
16120
16121
16122
16141
16123
16124
16125
16073
16074
16075
16076
16077
16078
16079
16080
16081
16082
16083
16084
16085
16064
16065
16066
16067
16068
16069
16070
16071
16072
Modbus
16055
16056
16057
16058
16059
16060
16061
16062
16063
16087
Description
Daily schedule start/end time in minutes
Daily schedule start/end time in minutes
Daily schedule start/end time in minutes
Daily schedule start/end time in minutes
Daily schedule start/end time in minutes
Daily schedule start/end time in minutes
Daily schedule start/end time in minutes
Daily schedule start/end time in minutes
Daily schedule start/end time in minutes
Daily schedule start/end time in minutes
Daily schedule start/end time in minutes
Daily schedule start/end time in minutes
Daily schedule start/end time in minutes
Daily schedule start/end time in minutes
Daily schedule start/end time in minutes
Daily schedule start/end time in minutes
Daily schedule start/end time in minutes
Daily schedule start/end time in minutes
Daily schedule start/end time in minutes
Daily schedule start/end time in minutes
Daily schedule start/end time in minutes
Daily schedule start/end time in minutes
Daily schedule start/end time in minutes
Daily schedule start/end time in minutes
Daily schedule start/end time in minutes
Daily schedule start/end time in minutes
Daily schedule start/end time in minutes
VFD frequency when occupied, requires blower control = VFD manual
VFD frequency when unoccupied, requires blower control = VFD manual
ECM speed when occupied, requires blower control = ECM manual
ECM speed when unoccupied, requires blower control = ECM manual
Mixing Box Outdoor Air Percent during occupied times, requires mixing box mode
= outdoor air percent
Mixing Box Outdoor Air Percent during unoccupied times, requires mixing box mode
= outdoor air percent
Economizer Temperature Setpoint Occupied
Economizer Temperature Setpoint Unoccupied
Economizer Temperature Band Setpoint Occupied
Economizer Temperature Band Setpoint Unoccupied
Economizer Temperature Total Band Setpoint Occupied
Economizer Temperature Total Band Setpoint Unoccupied
Economizer Relative Humidity Setpoint Occupied
Economizer Relative Humidity Setpoint Unoccupied
Mixing Box damper voltage during occupied times, requires mixing box mode = manual
Mixing Box damper voltage during unoccupied times, requires mixing box mode = manual
Blower Low Static Pressure Setting Occupied
Blower Low Static Pressure Setting Unoccupied
Blower High Static Pressure Setting Occupied
Blower High Static Pressure Setting Unoccupied
Dry Mode Discharge Occupied Setpoint
Dry Mode Discharge Unoccupied Setpoint
Outdoor Air Reset Low Temperature Setpoint
Outdoor Air Reset High Temperature Setpoint
Outdoor Air Reset Heat Discharge Temperature Setpoint
Outdoor Air Reset Cool Discharge Temperature Setpoint
Outdoor Air Reset Heat Space Temperature Setpoint
Outdoor Air Reset Cool Space Temperature Setpoint
CO2 PPM level at 0V
CO2 PPM level at 10V
CO2 sensor threshold limit for the fan/damper to operate when occupied
CO2 sensor threshold limit for the fan/damper to operate when unoccupied
Dynamic Setpoint Differential
Dynamic Setpoint Differential Offset
Dynamic Setpoint Heat Outdoor Air
99
LiquidLineTemp (5)
EvapIndoorCoilTemp (5)
CondOutdoorCoilTemp (5)
CompressorDischargeTemp (5)
IntakeRh (5)
SpaceRh (5)
OutdoorRh (5)
DischargeRh (5)
ReturnRh (5)
SuctionLinePs (5)
DischargeLinePs (5)
LiquidLinePs (5)
Hmi1Rh (5)
Hmi2Rh (5)
Hmi3Rh (5)
Hmi4Rh (5)
Hmi5Rh (5)
SupplyPwmRate (5)
ExhaustPwmRate (5)
CondFan1PwmRate (5)
CondFan2PwmRate (5)
ModulatingGasValve1Output (5)
ModulatingGasValve2Output (5)
AdjustableDamperOutput (5)
ElectricHeaterOutput (5)
OilBoostActiveFlag (5)
ReheatActiveFlag (5)
DefrostActiveFlag (5)
PumpdownOffActiveFlag (5)
Name
DynamicSpCoolOa (3)
ErvWheelSpeed (2)
ErvExhaustFanSpeedOcc (2)
ErvExhaustFanSpeedUnocc (2)
ErvExhaustLowPsSpOcc (2)
ErvExhaustLowPsSpUnocc (2)
ErvExhaustHighPsSpOcc (2)
ErvExhaustHighPsSpUnocc (2)
CO2OverrideHighLimitOcc (2)
CO2OverrideLowLimitOcc (2)
CO2OverrideHighLimitUnocc (2)
CO2OverrideLowLimitUnocc (2)
DryModeOASP (3)
DryModeCoolSP (3)
135
136
PoweredExhaustManVoltsOcc (2) 137
PoweredExhaustManVoltsUnocc (2) 138
131
132
133
134
126
127
128
129
130
ID
123
124
125
UnitStatus (5)
CurrentOccupiedStatus (5)
CalculateAverageSpaceTemp (5)
Vfd571ActualFreq (5)
Vfd571MotorCurrent (5)
Vfd571OutputPower (5)
CalculatedAverageRh (5)
OutdoorStatTemp (5)
ReturnStatTemp (5)
DischargeStatTemp (5)
IntakeStatTemp (5)
SpaceStatTemp (5)
Hmi1Temp (5)
Hmi2Temp (5)
Hmi3Temp (5)
Hmi4Temp (5)
Hmi5Temp (5)
SuctionLineTemp (5)
153
154
155
156
148
149
150
151
152
144
145
146
147
139
140
141
142
143
170
171
172
173
174
166
167
168
169
162
163
164
165
157
158
159
160
161
179
180
181
182
183
175
176
177
178
184
185
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
Binary Input (BI)
BI
BI
BI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
Analog Input (AI)
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
Object Type
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
Lon SNVT NAME nviDynSpCoolOa/nvoDynSpCoolOa nviErvWheelSpeed/nvoErvWheelSpeed nviErvEFSpeedOcc/nvoErvEFSpeedOcc nviErvEFSpeedUn/nvoErvEFSpeedUn nviErvExLPsSpOcc/nvoErvExLPsSpOcc nviErvExLPsSpUn/nvoErvExLPsSpUn nviErvExHPsSpOcc/nvoErvExHPsSpOcc nviErvExHPsSpUn/nvoErvExHPsSpUn
Function
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor nviCO2OrHighOcc/nvoCO2OrHighOcc nviCO2OrLowOcc/nvoCO2OrLowOcc nviCO2OrHighUn/nvoCO2OrHighUn nviCO2OrLowUn/nvoCO2OrLowUn
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor nviDryModeOASP/nvoDryModeOASP nviDryModeCoolSP/nvoDryModeCoolSP
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor nviEFManPWMOcc/nvoEFManPWMOcc Control/Monitor nviEFManPWMUnocc/nvoEFManPWMUnocc Control/Monitor nvoCurrentState nvoOccStatus nvoAvgSpaceTemp nvoBlowVFDFreq nvoBlowVFDAmps nvoBlowVFDPower nvoAvgRh nvoOutdoorTemp nvoReturnTemp nvoDischargeTemp nvoIntakeTemp nvoSpaceTemp nvoHmi1Temp nvoHmi2Temp nvoHmi3Temp nvoHmi4Temp nvoHmi5Temp nvoSucLineTemp nvoLiqLineTemp nvoEvapCoilTemp nvoOutCoilTemp nvoCompDisTemp nvoIntakeRh nvoSpaceRh
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only nvoOutdoorRh nvoDischargeRh nvoReturnRh nvoSucLinePs nvoDisLinePs nvoLiqLinePs nvoHmi1Rh nvoHmi2Rh nvoHmi3Rh
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only nvoHmi4Rh nvoHmi5Rh nvoSupplyPwm nvoExhaustPwm nvoCond1PwmRate nvoCond2PwmRate nvoMGV1Output nvoMGV2Output nvoDampOutput nvoElecHeatOut nvoOilBoostON nvoReheatON nvoDefrostON nvoPumpOFFOn
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
9066
9067
9069
9070
9071
9072
9073
9078
9079
2152
2190
9057
9058
9059
9060
2083
2140
2144
2146
2150
9061
9063
9064
9065
16134
16135
16143
16142
16137
16138
16139
16140
Modbus
16126
16127
16128
16129
16130
16131
16132
16133
9100
9101
1039
1040
1041
1042
1046
1047
9085
1051
4000
4001
4002
4003
1048
9090
9091
9092
9093
9094
9097
9098
9099
Description
Dynamic Setpoint Cool Outdoor Air
Energy Wheel Speed Setting
Energy Wheel Exhaust Fan Speed Occupied
Energy Wheel Exhaust Fan Speed Unoccupied
Energy Wheel Exhaust Low Pressure Setpoint Occupied
Energy Wheel Exhaust Low Pressure Setpoint Unoccupied
Energy Wheel Exhaust High Pressure Setpoint Occupied
Energy Wheel Exhaust High Pressure Setpoint Unoccupied
CO2 high limit setting at which fan/damper will operate occupied
CO2 low limit setting at which fan/damper will operate occupied
CO2 high limit setting at which fan/damper will operate unoccupied
CO2 low limit setting at which fan/damper will operate unoccupied
Dry Mode Outdoor Air Setpoint
Dry Mode Cool Setpoint
Powered Exhaust PWM Setpoint Occupied
Powered Exhaust PWM Setpoint Unoccupied
HVAC State (Idle = 0, Blower = 1, Heating = 2, Cooling = 3)
Occupancy status, occupied = 1, unoccupied = 0
Average Space Temperature
Blower VFD Frequency
Blower VFD Current
Blower VFD Power
Average space relative humidity
Outdoor Temperature
Return Temperature
Discharge Temperature
Intake Temperature
Space Temperature (thermistor)
Unit HMI temperature
Remote HMI 1 Temperature
Remote HMI 2 Temperature
Remote HMI 3 Temperature
Remote HMI 4 Temperature
Suction Line Temperature
Liquid Line Temperature
Evaporator Coil Temperature
Condenser Coil Temperature
Compressor Discharge Temperature
Intake Sensor Relative Humidity
Space Sensor Relative Humidity
Outdoor Sensor Relative Humidity
Discharge Sensor Relative Humidity
Return Sensor Relative Humidity
Suction Line Pressure
Discharge Line Pressure
Liquid Line Pressure
Unit HMI Relative Humidity
Remote HMI 1 Relative Humidity
Remote HMI 2 Relative Humidity
Remote HMI 3 Relative Humidity
Remote HMI 4 Relative Humidity
PWM Signal to Supply Fan
PWM Signal to Exhaust Fan
PWM Signal to set #1 of Condensing Fans
PWM Signal to set #2 of Condensing Fans
Controller output to the modulating gas valve #1. 0V = Low Fire, 10V = High Fire
Controller output to the modulating gas valve #2. 0V = Low Fire, 10V = High Fire
Output Voltage to Damper
Output Voltage to Electric Heater
0 = Oil Boost Not Active, 1 = Oil Boost Active
0 = Reheat Not Active, 1 = Reheat Active
0 = Defrost Not Active, 1 = Defrost Active
0 = Pumpdown Off Not Active, 1 = Pumpdown Off Active
100
207
208
209
210
202
203
204
205
206
211
212
213
214
215
198
199
200
201
194
195
196
197
189
190
191
192
193
ID
186
187
188
216
237
238
239
240
241
233
234
235
236
242
243
244
245
228
229
230
231
232
224
225
226
227
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
Name
PumpdownOnActiveFlag (5)
ReheatValvePosition (5)
EevValvePosition (5)
IntakeDpActual (5)
SpaceDpActual (5)
CompressorPower (5)
CompressorFrequency (5)
CompressorCurrent (5)
ERVExhaustAirRh (5)
ERVWheelSupplyPsInches (5)
ERVWheelExhPsInches (5)
ERVExhCtrlVolts (5)
ERVExhAirTemp (5)
ERVOutsideAirRh (5)
ERVOutsideAirTemp (5)
ERVExhBlowerDutyCycle (5)
ERVExhBlowerPwmEnable (5)
ERVWheelDutyCycle (5)
ERVWheelPwmEnable (5)
ERVState (5)
ERVAppliedWheelSpeed (5)
ERVAppliedExhFanSpeed (5)
Subcool (5)
Superheat (5)
ActiveFault1 (5)
ActiveFault2 (5)
ActiveFault3 (5)
ActiveFault4 (5)
ActiveFault5 (5)
ActiveFault6 (5)
SchedulingEnabledFlag (4)
HeatTemperModeOcc (2)
HeatTemperModeUnocc (2)
CoolTemperModeOcc (2)
CoolTemperModeUnocc (2)
ActivateOnOcc (2)
ActivateOnUnocc (2)
BlowerModeOcc (2)
BlowerModeUnocc (2)
MixingBoxMode (2)
ReheatDPAdjOcc (2)
ReheatDPAdjUnocc (2)
BlowerVfdMinFreqOcc (2)
BlowerVfdMinFreqUnocc (2)
BlowerVfdMaxFreqOcc (2)
BlowerVfdMaxFreqUnocc (2)
BlowerPwmMinRateOcc (2)
BlowerPwmMinRateUnocc (2)
BlowerPwmMaxRateOcc (2)
BlowerPwmMaxRateUnocc (2)
MixingBoxMinOAPercentOcc (2)
MixingBoxMinOAPercentUnocc (2)
MixingBoxMaxOAPercentOcc (2)
MixingBoxMaxOAPercentUnocc (2)
MixingBoxMinVoltsOcc (2)
MixingBoxMinVoltsUnocc (2)
MixingBoxMaxVoltsOcc (2)
MixingBoxMaxVoltsUnocc (2)
CFMReading (5)
StaticPressure (5)
AI
AI
AI
AI
BI
AI
BI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
Object Type
BI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
BV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AI
AI
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV
AV nviSchedEnabled/nvoSchedEnabled nviHeatModeOcc/nvoHeatModeOcc nviHeatModeUnocc/nvoHeatModeUnocc nviCoolModeOcc/nvoCoolModeOcc nviCoolModeUnocc/nvoCoolModeUnocc nviActivateOcc/nvoActivateOcc nviActivateUnocc/nvoActivateUnocc nviBlowModeOcc/nvoBlowModeOcc nviBlowModeUnocc/nvoBlowModeUnocc nviMBMode/nvoMBMode nviDPAdjOcc/nvoDPAdjOcc nviDPAdjUnocc/nvoDPAdjUnocc nviVFDMinFreqOcc/nvoVFDMinFreqOcc nviVFDMinFUnocc/nvoVFDMinFUnocc nviVFDMaxFreqOcc/nvoVFDMaxFreqOcc nviVFDMaxFUnocc/nvoVFDMaxFUnocc nviPWMMinOcc/nvoPWMMinOcc nviPWMMinUnocc/nvoPWMMinUnocc nviPWMMaxOcc/nvoPWMMaxOcc nviPWMMaxUnocc/nvoPWMMaxUnocc nviMBMinOAPerOcc/nvoMBMinOAPerOcc nviMBMinOAPerUn/nvoMBMinOAPerUn nviMBMaxOAPerOcc/nvoMBMaxOAPerOcc nviMBMaxOAPerUn/nvoMBMaxOAPerUn nviMBMinVoltsOcc/nvoMBMinVoltsOcc nviMBMinVoltsUn/nvoMBMinVoltsUn nviMBMaxVoltsOcc/nvoMBMaxVoltsOcc nviMBMaxVoltsUn/nvoMBMaxVoltsUn nvoCFMReading nvoStaticPress
Lon SNVT NAME nvoPumpONOn nvoReheatPos nvoEevValvePos nvoInDpActual nvoSpDpActual nvoCompPower nvoCompFreq nvoCompAmps nvoERVExhRh nvoERVSupplyPs nvoERVExhPs nvoERVExhVolts nvoERVExhTemp nvoERVOARh nvoERVOATemp nvoERVExhDuty nvoERVExhPwmEn nvoERVWheelDuty nvoERVWheelPwmEn nvoERVState nvoERVAppWSpeed nvoERVAppEFSpeed nvoSubcool nvoSuperheat nvoActiveFault0 nvoActiveFault1 nvoActiveFault2 nvoActiveFault3 nvoActiveFault4 nvoActiveFault5
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Function
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Monitor Only
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Control/Monitor
Read Only
Read Only
15016
15075
15089
15154
15155
15078
15079
15080
15081
15082
15055
15056
15057
15058
15059
15060
15074
15083
15084
15085
15092
15093
15094
15095
15222
15223
15224
15225
2207
2224
4077
4078
4081
4082
4083
4084
4085
4087
Modbus
4004
4028
4029
4030
4032
2152
2157
2150
4115
4132
4133
30501
30502
30503
4088
4089
4090
4113
4114
30504
30505
30506
Description
0 = Pumpdown On Not Active, 1 = Pumpdown On Active
Percentage of the Reheat Valve’s Position
Percentage of the EEV Valve’s Position
Actual Intake Dew Point Reading
Actual Space Dew Point Reading
Compressor Power Reading
Compressor Frequency Reading
Compressor Current Reading
ERV Exhaust Air Relative Humidity
ERV Wheel Supply Pressure Differential
ERV Wheel Exhaust Pressure Differential
0-10 Volt ERV Exhaust Speed Control
ERV Exhaust Air Temperature
ERV Outside Air Relative Humidity
ERV Outside Air Temperature
PWM Signal to Exhaust Fan ECM
0 = Disable, 1 = Enable
PWM Signal to ERV Wheel ECM
0 = Disable, 1 = Enable
0 = Idle, 5 = Defrost, 6 = Clean, 7 = Test, 8 = Stop
Desired Energy Wheel Fan Speed
Desired ERV Exhaust Fan Speed
Subcool Readings
Superheat Readings
Active Fault Code (see fault code table)
Active Fault Code (see fault code table)
Active Fault Code (see fault code table)
Active Fault Code (see fault code table)
Active Fault Code (see fault code table)
Active Fault Code (see fault code table)
Enable scheduling. Not an occupancy command. Refer to ID 5 “DDCOccupiedOverride” to toggle between occupied/unoccupied
Heat tempering mode during occupied time
Heat tempering mode during unoccupied time
Cool tempering mode during occupied time
Cool tempering mode during unoccupied time
"Activate based on" during occupied time
"Activate based on" during unoccupied time
Blower mode during occupied times
Blower mode during unoccupied times
Mixing Box mode selection
Reheat Dew Point adjust setpoint value when occupied
Reheat Dew Point adjust setpoint value when unoccupied
Min blower VFD Frequency when occupied
Min blower VFD Frequency when unoccupied
Max blower VFD Frequency when occupied
Max blower VFD Frequency when unoccupied
Min blower ECM speed when occupied
Min blower ECM speed when unoccupied
Max blower ECM speed when occupied
Max blower ECM speed when unoccupied
Min occupied outdoor air percent when mixing box mode = outdoor air percent
Min unoccupied outdoor air percent when mixing box mode = outdoor air percent
Max occupied outdoor air percent when mixing box mode = outdoor air percent
Max unoccupied outdoor air percent when mixing box mode = outdoor air percent
Max unoccupied mixing box voltage when mixing box mode = manual
Min unoccupied mixing box voltage when mixing box mode = manual
Max occupied mixing box voltage when mixing box mode = manual
Max unoccupied mixing box voltage when mixing box mode = manual
Fan CFM Reading
Static Pressure
101
DDC Notes
(1) Full Control Points
• Use only if Heating and/or Cooling tempering mode has been set to “DDC” through the unit’s HMI.
• Setting the Heating and Cooling modes to “DDC” disables temperature based activation of these functions. The preferred heating and cooling activation method is to use space and/or intake temperatures along with unit setpoints.
• Heating and Cooling cannot be called for at the same time.
• The Fan Control point will only work if the heating or cooling mode is set to DDC.
(2) Factory Setting Points - Avoid writing to these on a regular basis.
• The SchedulingEnabledFlag point tells the unit whether scheduling is on/off. It is NOT an occupancy command.
• UnitStatus: 0 = Idle, 1 = Blower, 2 = Heating, 3 = Cooling
• MixingBoxMode: 0 = Off, 1 = Manual, 2 = 2 Position, 3 = OA Percent, 4 = Analog Ctrl, 5 = PS, 6 = 100% OA
• CurrentOccupiedStatus: 0 = OFF, 1 = ON
• ActivateOnOcc: 0 = Intake, 1 = Space, 2 = Both, 3 = Either, 4 = Stat
• ActivateOnUnocc: 0 = Intake, 1 = Space, 2 = Both, 3 = Either, 4 = Stat
• HeatTemperModeOcc: 0 = Discharge, 1 = Space, 2 = BAS, 3 = DDC
• HeatTemperModeUnocc: 0 = Discharge, 1 = Space, 2 = BAS, 3 = DDC
• CoolTemperModeOcc: 0 = Discharge, 1 = Space, 2 = BAS, 3 = DDC
• CoolTemperModeUnocc: 0 = Discharge, 1 = Space, 2 = BAS, 3 = DDC
• BlowerModeOcc: 0 = Auto, 1 = OFF, 2 = ON
• BlowerModeUnocc: 0 = Auto, 1 = OFF, 2 = ON
(3) Temperature Setpoints
• The preferred method for DDC control is through setpoint manipulation. Use the setpoints shown above along with the
“DDC Occupied Override” point in the Runtime settings section to control the blower and to determine when to heat or cool.
• Temperatures can be in degrees F or degrees C, depending on the “Temp Units” point in the factory settings.
(4) On-Board Scheduling
• Values are based on minutes in a day. 1439 minutes = 11:59 PM, 0 = 12:00AM.
• The end value of the A set or B set must be greater than or equal to the start value in that set (A start <= A end, B start
<= B end).
• The B set must be greater than the A set and cannot overlap it (A end <= B start).
• The value 1440 is a special value meaning that there is no scheduling for that set. Both the start and end value of a set must have the value for it to be valid. If the A set has this value, the B set must also have this value (no scheduling for the entire day).
NOTE: The preferred method for a BMS to control occupancy is through the “DDC Occupied Override” binary point. The “On-Board Schedule” points should all be set to unoccupied (1440) if the “DDC Occupied Override” is used.
(5) Sensor Values and Alerts
• For Alert Codes 1-6, refer to “DDC Faults” on page 103 .
102
DDC Faults
Refer to
“Troubleshooting” on page 110 for more information.
Description
None
FireDetect
SmokeDetect
SupplyOverload
ExhaustOverload
MasterRomCrc
AuxRomCrc
FlameProving
IntakeFirestat
DischargeFirestat
Freezestat
Overheat
HighTempLimit
FireEyeAlarm
GasHighPs
GasLowPs
AuxGasHighPs
AuxGasLowPs
CoAlarm
EvapWaterPs
EvapFloat
DxFloat
FurnaceFloat
BlowerVfdMbComm
DoorInterlock
ScrollDxVfdMbComm
MuaToAuxMbComm
IntakeDamperEnd
DischargeDamperEnd
BlowerAirProving
CloggedFilter
MissingSensorIntake
BrokenSensorIntake
MissingSensorDischarge
BrokenSensorDischarge
MissingSensorSpace
BrokenSensorSpace
MissingSensorOutsideAir
BrokenSensorOutsideAir
MissingSensorReturn
BrokenSensorReturn
MissingSensorSuctionLine
BrokenSensorSuctionLine
MissingSensorIndoorCoil
BrokenSensorIndoorCoil
MissingSensorOutdoorCoil
BrokenSensorOutdoorCoil
22
23
24
25
19
20
21
26
27
28
14
15
16
17
18
7
8
9
5
6
Code
0
1
2
3
4
10
11
12
13
41
42
43
44
37
38
39
40
45
46
33
34
35
36
29
30
31
32
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
108
109
110
111
112
Code
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
135
136
137
138
131
132
133
134
139
140
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
88
89
90
91
84
85
86
87
92
93
80
81
82
83
76
77
78
79
69
70
71
72
66
67
68
73
74
75
61
62
63
64
65
52
53
54
55
56
Code Description
47 MissingSensorDxDischarge
48 BrokenSensorDxDischarge
49 RtcTempSensor
50
51
AuxRtcTempSensor
Hmi0TempInvalid
57
58
59
60
Hmi1TempInvalid
Hmi2TempInvalid
Hmi3TempInvalid
Hmi4TempInvalid
ProofOfClosure
LowFlameVoltage
SpPressureLowLimit
SpPressureHighLimit
Fsc1HighTemp
Fsc2HighTemp
AuxFsc1HighTemp
AuxFsc2HighTemp
Fsc1Rollout
Fsc2Rollout
AuxFsc1Rollout
AuxFsc2Rollout
Fsc1VentProving
Fsc2VentProving
AuxFsc1VentProving
AuxFsc2VentProving
LowRefridgePs
HighRefridgePs
RefridgeDischargeTemp
OilLow
DxEnvCondTempHigh
DxEnvCondTempLow
DxEnvEvapTempHigh
DxEnvEvapTempLow
DxEnvAngle
MaxHeadPs
EevPs
EevTemp
MinSuctionPs
ElectricHeat
SpaceRh
IntakeRh
DischargeRh
ScrollDxVfdNotAutoOn
MissingSensorLiquidLine
BrokenSensorLiquidLine
HmiMbComm0
HmiMbComm1
Description
HmiMbComm2
HmiMbComm3
HmiMbComm4
DnfsPwrCardTemp
DnfsEarthFault
DnfsCtrlCardTemp
DnfsCtrlWordTimeout
DnfsOverCurrent
DnfsTorqueLimit
DnfsMotorEtrOver
DnfsInverterOvld
DnfsDcUnderVolt
DnfsDcOverVolt
DnfsShortCircuit
DnfsInrushFault
DnfsMainsPhaseLoss
DnfsInternalFault
DnfsUPhaseLoss
DnfsVPhaseLoss
DnfsWPhaseLoss
Dnfs24vSupplyLow
DnfsMainsFail
DnfsDriveInit
DnfsSafeStop
DnfsStartFail
DnfsSpeedLimit
DnfsCurrentLimit
Co2ShutdownRequired
Co2Override
ErvSupplyCloggedFilter
ErvExhaustCloggedFilter
ErvDeadbandFail
ErvExhaustAirProving
Vfd571IgbtTemp
Vfd571Output
Vfd571Ground
Vfd571Temp
Vfd571FlyingStart
Vfd571HighDcBus
Vfd571LowDcBus
Vfd571Overload
Vfd571Oem
Vfd571IllegalSetup
Vfd571DynamicBrake
Vfd571PhaseLost
Vfd571External
Vfd571Control
103
145
146
147
148
149
Code
141
142
143
144
150
151
152
153
154
155
Description
Vfd571Start
Vfd571IncompatParamSet
Vfd571EpmHw
Vfd571Internal1
Vfd571Internal2
Vfd571Internal3
Vfd571Internal4
Vfd571Internal5
Vfd571Internal6
Vfd571Internal7
Vfd571Internal8
Vfd571Personality
Vfd571Internal10
Vfd571RemoteKeypadLost
Vfd571AssertionLevel
160
161
162
163
164
Code
156
157
158
159
165
166
167
168
169
170
Description
Vfd571Internal11
Vfd571Internal12
Vfd571Internal13
Vfd571Internal14
Vfd571CommModuleFail
Vfd571Network
Vfd571Network1
Vfd571Network2
Vfd571Network3
Vfd571Network4
Vfd571Network5
Vfd571Network6
Vfd571Network7
Vfd571Network8
Vfd571Network9
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
Code
171
172
173
174
Description
ReturnRh
ErvExhaustRh
OutsideRh
Co2Threshold
ErvDoorInterlock
ExternalInterlockActive
Missing2ndEvapSensor
Broken2ndEvapSensor
ErvSupplyMissingFilter
ErvExhaustMissingFilter
AcbMbComm
ExhFanContactor1Prv
ExhFanContactor2Prv
104
SERVICE INFORMATION
WARNING:
Technicians must be certified by an EPA-approved training and certification program to service any HVAC equipment, regardless of the refrigerant.
Basic Service
NOTE: Always wear gloves and eye protection when working with refrigerant.
NOTE: Purge lines before connecting to service ports.
Figure 58 - Refrigeration Service Tools and Service Port Locations
Gauge Set Refrigerant Recovery
Cylinder
Recovery Machine Vacuum Pump
SUCTION DISCHARGE
Blue
Hose
Yellow
Hose
Red
Hose
High Side
Service Port
Low Side
Service Port
Liquid Line
Service Port
Monitoring the A/C System
Monitoring with HMI
The HMI can monitor the A/C temperature and pressure readings through the service function menu. Enter
HMI menu function by pressing the top two buttons simultaneously. Navigate to Service (Password 1234)
> Inputs > Refridge Diag .
The Refridge Diag menu will display the following:
• Discharge Pressure (DSCHRG PS)
• Discharge Condensing Temperature (DCH CON TMP)
• Suction Pressure (SUCTION PS)
• Suction Saturation Temperature (SUC SAT TMP)
• Suction Line Temp (SUC LIN TMP)
• Superheat Temperature
• EEV Position Percentage
• Compressor Hertz
• PWM Rate Percentage
• Oil Voltage - Yes/No
105
Monitoring with Gauge Set
1. Close the high side hand valve (red) and low side hand valve (blue).
2. Connect vacuum rated manifold service hoses, refer to Figure 58 on page 105 .
• Red service hose to the high side service port.
• Blue service hose to the low side service port.
• Verify the yellow service hose is capped when not connected to a refrigerant tank, recovery tank, or vacuum pump.
3. Connect a standard pressure gauge set to the service port located on the leaving side of the outdoor
4. Start the system.
5. If the service hoses have a manual turn valve, open the valve. Monitor the following:
• The low side and high side gauges.
• The superheat reading should be 20°F.
6. Refer to
to determine subcool. Compressor must be running at 100%, and condenser fan temperature must be 110°F. Subcool should be approximately 10-20°F. ï€
NOTE: subcool readings will vary based on ambient and condensing fan temperatures .
7. Determining the readings:
- If the readings are correct, close the gauge set and shut down the system. Disconnect the gauge
set, refer to “Removing Manifold Gauge Set” on page 109 .
- If the readings are incorrect, follow the
“System Troubleshooting Chart” on page 110 to locate
and repair the problem.
Recovering Refrigerant from the System
1. Connect vacuum rated manifold service hoses, refer to Figure 58 on page 105 :
• Red service hose to the high side service port.
• Blue service hose to the low side service port.
• Connect the yellow service hose to the inlet port of the recovery machine.
• Connect a hose from the discharge port of the recovery machine to the recovery tank.
2. Purge all hoses of non-condensables before starting the system.
3. Place the system in ‘Evacuation Mode’. Enter HMI menu function by pressing the top two buttons simultaneously. Navigate to Service > Test Menu > Evacuation Mode > Enable .
4. When the system is in ‘Evacuation mode’, the EEV and reheat valve (if applicable) will open and allow full access to the system via the high and low side service ports. Ensure the compressor does not run by pressing ‘OFF/Reset’ on the compressor VFD HMI.
5. Open the connected valve on the recovery tank.
6. Turn the recovery unit on.
7. Open the low side and high side hand valves.
8. Monitor the gauge set until all refrigerant has been recovered and the system is under a proper vacuum.
106
Nitrogen Purging
Whenever brazing will be performed in the system, flowing nitrogen through the system is required. This should be done when unsweating connections or brazing new components in the system. Remove
Schrader core from the inlet and outlet path for full flow and minimize back-pressure. This step is critical to prevent oxidation and protect the system from contaminants.
Pressure Testing
Anytime repairs are made, use dry nitrogen to verify there are no leaks in the system. Connect the dry nitrogen tank to the high and low service ports, ensuring the entire system will be pressurized. Pressurize the system to 350-400 PSI. Use soap bubbles or another liquid leak solvent to check for leaks. Check the system for approximately 15 minutes.
- If there are leaks, evacuate the nitrogen from the system. Repair as necessary.
- If there are no leaks, evacuate the nitrogen from the system.
For instructions on how to evacuate the system, refer to “Evacuating the System”
.
Evacuating the System
1. Connect vacuum rated manifold service hoses, refer to Figure 58 on page 105 :
• Red service hose to the high side service port.
• Blue service hose to the low side service port.
• Connect the yellow service hose to the vacuum pump.
2. Connect a micron gauge to the service port located on the leaving side of the outdoor coil, refer to
3. Place the system in ‘Evacuation Mode’. Enter HMI menu function by pressing the top two buttons simultaneously. Navigate to Service > Test Menu > Evacuation Mode > Enable .
4. When the system is in ‘Evacuation mode’, the EEV and reheat valve (if applicable) will open and allow full access to the system via the high and low side service ports. Ensure the compressor does not run by pressing ‘OFF/Reset’ on the compressor VFD HMI.
5. Open the high side hand valve (red) and low side hand valve (blue). Start the vacuum pump.
6. Pump the system down until the micron gauge reads 500 microns.
7. Close off the valve to the vacuum pump. Turn the pump off.
8. Monitor the micron gauge for twenty minutes. Make sure it does not rise above 1000 microns.
- If the reading goes above 1000 microns in less than twenty minutes, there is a leak or moisture in the system. Determine the issue and repair.
- If the reading stays below 1000 microns, close all valves on the manifold gauge set.
9. Charge the system, refer to
“Charging an Empty System” on page 108 .
NOTE: To prevent trapping liquid refrigerant in the manifold gauge set, make sure the gauge set is brought to suction pressure before disconnecting.
107
Charging an Empty System
1. Connect the manifold service hoses, refer to Figure 58 on page 105 :
• Blue service hose to the liquid side service port.
• Connect the yellow service hose to refrigerant source.
2. Connect a temperature clamp near the liquid line service port located on the leaving side of the outdoor coil, refer to
.
3. Place the system in ‘Evacuation Mode’. Enter HMI menu function by pressing the top two buttons simultaneously. Go to Service > Test Menu > Evacuation Mode > Enable .
4. When the system is in ‘Evacuation mode’, the EEV and reheat valve (if applicable) will open and allow full access to the system via the high side, low side, and liquid line service ports.
5. Ensure the compressor does not run by pressing ‘OFF/Reset’ on the compressor VFD HMI.
6. Open the valve on the refrigerant source.
7. Open the low side hand valve (blue) on the manifold set.
NOTE: Unit should be charged with liquid refrigerant.
8. Once the unit has at least 50% of the charge from the unit label, close the valve on the refrigerant source and the low side hand valve (blue) on the manifold set. Abort ‘Evacuation Mode.’
9. Remove blue service hose from the liquid line service port.
10. Connect blue service hose to the low side service port. Verify the yellow service hose is connected to the manifold and refrigerant source.
11. Open the valve on the refrigerant source.
13. Verify the unit is in an idle state (it should not be in cooling, heating, reheat, or blower only modes).
- Occupied scheduling must be disabled. Go to Factory Settings > Occupancy Config >
Scheduling > Off .
- Turn on the cooling system through the service test menu. Go to Service > Test Menu > Test Cool/
HP > Select unit’s cooling type .
- Set the compressor to run at maximum speed and verify reheat voltage is set to 0V.
- Adjust condensing fans so that the condensing coil maintains a 110°F liquid saturation temperature.
14. To prevent damage to the compressor, do not open the hand valve all the way. Crack open the low side hand valve (blue) on the manifold set.
15. Continue charging the system until the following conditions are met:
- Refer to Table 16 on page 120
to determine subcool.
- Compressor must be running at 100%, and condenser fan temperature must be 110°F.
- Subcool should be approximately 10-20°F. NOTE: subcool readings will vary based on ambient and condensing fan temperatures .
- The superheat reading should be 20°F.
16. Close the low side hand valve (blue). Monitor the gauge set, and determine if the system is operating properly.
NOTE: Once the unit is back to full operation, verify any altered settings (i.e. Scheduling) are changed back to their last set configuration.
108
Charging System Low on Refrigerant
1. To add refrigerant with system running, open the low side hand valve (blue).
2. Start the unit. Verify the unit is in an idle state (it should not be in cooling, heating, reheat, or blower only modes). Occupied scheduling must be disabled.
3. Navigate to Service > Test Menu > State > Cool/HP to activate system test. Once the test is active, you may monitor and adjust settings.
• Set the compressor to run at maximum speed.
• Adjust condensing fans, and monitor the condensing coil maintains a 110°F temperature.
• Verify reheat voltage is set to 0V.
4. Monitor the system until the following conditions are met:
- Refer to Table 16 on page 120
to determine subcool.
- Compressor must be running at 100%, and condenser fan temperature must be 110°F.
- Subcool should be approximately 10-20°F. NOTE: Subcool readings will vary based on ambient and condensing fan temperatures .
- The superheat reading should be 20°F.
5. Check compressor oil level after a repair. Refer to “Compressor Information” on page 52 for
compressor models and oil type information.
Removing Manifold Gauge Set
1. Make sure the hand valves are closed.
2. Make sure the refrigerant source is closed / the vacuum pump is not running.
3. Disconnect all hoses from the service valve ports.
4. Install the service port caps. Tighten by hand.
109
Troubleshooting
The following tables and information list possible causes and corrective actions for possible problems.
Review this section prior to consulting technical support.
System Troubleshooting Chart
Problem Potential Cause Corrective Action
Unit will not start
Unit On - HMI Off
System operates continuously - poor cooling/heating ï€
(heat pump mode)
System operates – blows cold air in heat pump mode
System operates - blows cold air in gas heat mode
System runs – blows cold air in electric heat mode
Power failure
Compressor
Check voltage to the unit.
Check the disconnect switch.
Check the circuit breaker.
Check the hot, neutral, and ground wiring.
Power Issue
Dirty indoor coil
Check connector J13 is properly connected.
Check wiring from HMI to connector J13.
Shortage of refrigerant
Verify the circuit breaker (CB-01) is On.
Test for leaks. Add refrigerant.
Restricted discharge line Repair or replace as required.
Dirty or clogged filters Inspect filters. Clean or replace.
Inspect coil. Clean the coil, refer to
Cleaning Procedure” on page 135
.
Low airflow across indoor coil
Check blower speed, duct static pressure, filters.
Verify compressor modulates between Min to
Max frequency.
Electronic Expansion
Valve (EEV)
Compressor
Incorrect refrigerant
Non-condensable in system
Verify EEV position is 0% when not in heating or cooling under Refridge Diag. See
“Monitoring the A/C System” on page 105.
Check the correct EEV is installed.
Refer to
.
Verify compressor modulates between Min to
Max frequency.
Refer to
“Superheat and Subcooling” on page 120 to check parameters.
Recover the charge, evacuate the system.
Recharge the system. Refer to
.
Test reversing valve.
Test defrost control.
Faulty reversing valve
Defrost control
Gas supply issue
Faulty gas train components.
Refer to
“Furnace Troubleshooting Chart” on page 119
.
Improper wiring Check electrical wiring.
Electric disconnect switch Check electric heater disconnect switch
Fuse in electric heater panel
Check fuses, replace is required.
Airflow Switch
Check airflow switch and tubing at the MUA board.
110
HMI Fault Codes
Problem Potential Cause Corrective Action
Fire
Smoke (optional)
Gas PS High
(optional)
Gas PS Low
(optional)
Supply Overload
Exhaust Overload
There is an input from the fire detector.
There is an input from the smoke detector.
The board is receiving an input on the gas pressure high terminal.
The board lost input on the gas pressure low terminal. There should be an input when gas pressure is at the proper level.
Motor overload has tripped.
Check wiring. Repair broken or loose wiring connections.
Replace fire detector.
Verify the smoke detector is set up properly.
Check wiring. Repair broken or loose wiring connections.
Replace smoke detector.
Adjust regulator or add regulator.
Check wiring. Repair broken or loose wiring connections.
Replace switch.
Refer to “High Gas Pressure Switch
Low gas pressure switch.
Check wiring. Repair broken or loose wiring connections.
Replace switch.
Refer to “Low Gas Pressure Switch
Check motor for debris.
Check contactor/motor wiring connections.
Check overload reset button.
Check overload amperage setting.
Stat Missing
(Return, Outside,
Intake, Discharge,
Space, Coil)
Stat Broken (Return,
Outside, Intake,
Discharge, Space,
Coil)
If the temperature sensor signal being sensed is too low, a missing fault will be active.
If the temperature sensor signal being sensed is too high, a broken fault will be active.
Check motor bearings.
Install and wire sensor.
Check for faulty wiring, refer to
“Temperature Sensor” on page 125
Install and wire sensor.
Check for faulty wiring, refer to
“Temperature Sensor” on page 125
.
.
Space HMI Missing
RTC 1 Temp Sensor
One of the HMIs in the system is not connected properly, or one of the settings is not properly set.
Real-Time Clock (RTC) temperature sensor located on MUA board.
Verify that the “# of HMIs” is set correctly.
Verify there is no damage to the HMI(s).
Check for loose or damaged wiring to
HMI(s).
If space temperature is being utilized, make sure “HMI Averaging” is set to ‘On’ for all space HMIs.
Verify there is no damage to the MUA board or the wiring to the MUA board.
111
Problem
Airflow
FSC1 High Temp
FSC1 Rollout
FSC Vent Proving
Min Low Pressure
Limit
Refrigerant Low PS
Refrigerant High PS
Potential Cause Corrective Action
Signal was not received from air switch when supply blower was running.
The Flame Safety Controller (FSC) continually and safely monitors, analyze, and controls the proper operation of the gas burner and inducer motor.
If flame-rollout is present, the switch deenergizes heater circuit on individual furnace. Must be manually reset by pressing the small button on the switch.
The FSC verifies that airflow is sensed by the induced draft air sensor.
Verify supply fan operation, refer to
“Start-Up Procedure” on page 78 .
Check damper operation.
Check airflow switch and tubing at the
MUA board.
Check connector J7 on the MUA board.
Make sure the connection is secure.
High limit switch failed open. There should be continuity.
Check wiring to the switches.
Reset the switch.
Rollout switch failed open. There should be continuity.
Check for a blocked tube, low airflow, or low gas pressure.
Kinked/blocked/damaged hose.
Blockage in vent system. Poor venting.
Check bleed hole in proving switch.
Clogged condensation drain.
Power vent motor.
Failed vent proving switch.
Refer to
“Vent Proving Switch (PS-01)” on page 127
.
The suction pressure for the compressor is below the minimum threshold in software.
If the system is operating at a low pressure and temperature range, the system can become inoperable.
If the system is operating at a high pressure and temperature range, the system can become inoperable.
Follow possible checks for “Refrigerant
Low PS.”
Verify low pressure switch operation.
Low Refrigerant. Refer to “Monitoring the A/C System” on page 105 .
Verify high pressure switch operation.
Faulty condensing fan motor.
Outside coil plugged.
Inadequate airflow across coil.
Blockage in the system. Refer to
“Monitoring the A/C System” on page 105 .
Refrigerant
DSCHRG Temp
(Heat Pump)
Discharge temperature is out of range.
Follow possible checks for “Refrigerant
High PS”.
112
Problem
Oil Sensor
Envelope Cond
Temp High
Envelope Cond
Temp Low
Envelope Angle
Max Head Pressure
Freezestat lockout
(optional)
Overheat Stat lockout (optional)
Firestat lockout
(optional)
Suction PS
Temp Sens
DX/Condensation
Float Detect
Modbus System
Communication
The oil level sensor monitors the compressor’s internal oil level. Refer to
“Compressor Information” on page 52
.
Input signal from the drain pan float switch.
Potential Cause
Indoor and outdoor coil operating temperatures are too high.
Indoor and outdoor coil operating temperatures are too low.
Indoor and outdoor coil operating temperatures are out of range.
The max head pressure for the compressor is too high.
The discharge temperature was too low for a long period of time.
The discharge temperature was too high for a long period of time.
Intake or discharge temperatures exceeded the firestat set point.
MUA Board has detected a pressure sensor failure.
MUA Board has detected a temperature sensor failure.
Software mismatch.
Corrective Action
Low oil level, if sight glass is available, check level.
Oil depositing itself in pipes. Increase compressor velocity for short periods of time.
Refer to “Superheat and Subcooling” on page 120
to check parameters.
Check oil level sensor wiring.
Check transformer voltages.
Oil level sensor failure, refer to “Oil
Level Sensor (Sen-1)” on page 127
.
Follow possible checks for “Refrigerant
High PS”.
Refer to “Superheat and Subcooling” on page 120
to check parameters.
Follow possible checks for “Refrigerant
Low PS”.
Refer to “Superheat and Subcooling” on page 120
to check parameters.
Follow possible checks for “Refrigerant low PS” and “Refrigerant high PS”
Refer to “Superheat and Subcooling” on page 120
to check parameters.
Refer to “Monitoring the A/C System” on page 105
.
Check airflow.
Check gas pressure.
Check for proper burner firing.
Use the HMI to reset.
Check cooling system.
Use the HMI to reset.
Use the HMI to reset.
Check for bad regulators, or modulating valves.
Verify suction pressure transducer is operating correctly and wired properly.
Verify suction line temp sensor is operating correctly and wired properly.
Check EEV, refer to “Electronic
Expansion Valve (EEV-1)” on page 131 .
Make sure the pan drain is clear and water is draining.
Check for shorted wires.
Replace float switch.
Verify P410 (Modbus Address) is 21 on
VFD.
113
Problem
Supply VFD Comm Modbus communication fault.
Master ROM CRC
Clogged Filters
(optional)
Software mismatch.
Input from filter airflow switch.
Compressor Comm Communication Error.
Furnace Float
Electric Heater Fault
RH Sensor (Space,
Intake, Discharge)
HMI “x” Revision
Wrong
HMI Config Error
Compressor VFD
Off
DF Faults
Potential Cause
Input signal from the furnace condensation float switch is active.
Voltage input is lost while the electric heater is active.
One of the Relative Humidity (RH) sensors are not working.
Software mismatch.
HMI is not connected, or HMI is assigned incorrectly.
Compressor controller is set in the Off or
Hand On position.
DF faults are communicated from the compressor drive to the HMI.
Corrective Action
Check Modbus wiring and connections.
Verify Modbus address.
Verify Min and Max settings of the VFD to the MUA board settings. Go to Factory
Settings > Unit Options > Blower
Config > VFD Freq Limits .
Contact technical support.
Clean or replace filters.
Refer to “Clogged Filter Switch (PS-
Check wiring from Compressor VFD to compressor.
Refer to “Furnace Condensation
Drain” on page 17 to check float.
Verify pipe connections are not clogged.
Verify the pipes are draining.
Check for shorted wires.
Replace float switch.
Check electric heater wiring to board connector J7 pin 10.
Verify all other wiring is connected properly.
Check Fuse(s).
Refer to “Humidity/Temperature
.
Contact technical support to flash the appropriate software.
Install HMI or change HMI address using bottom 2 buttons on HMI. Refer to
“Configuring HMI” on page 57 .
Verify that the compressor controller is set to the Auto On position.
Refer to “Compressor Drive VFD
Troubleshooting Chart” on page 115 .
114
Compressor Drive VFD Troubleshooting Chart
Problem
Earth Fault
Control Word
Timeout
Over Current
Torque Limit
Inverter
Overload
DC Under Volt
DC Over Volt
Short Circuit
Potential Cause Corrective Action
There is current from the output phases to ground (earth) in the cables, or the motor.
There is no communication to the frequency converter. Only active if setting 8-04 is NOT set to [0] OFF.
This fault can be caused by shock loading, or quick acceleration with high inertia load.
The torque has exceeded the value in setting 4-16 or 4-17.
The converter is about to cut out because of an overload.
The thermal protection issues a warning at 98% and an alarm at
100%. This converter cannot be reset until the counter is at 90%.
Check the cables from the converter to the compressor.
Check for continuity from the compressor terminals to ground. There should be no continuity.
Verify wiring, and connections are correct.
Check cable connections to the converter.
Increase the Control Word Timeout time setting 8-03.
Check the communication components.
Make sure the unit is OFF. Verify the motor shaft can be turned.
Check the motor size matches the frequency converter.
Check parameters 1-20 to 1-25 for correct setup.
Check for excessive current draw on the motor.
If the motor torque limit is exceeded during ramp-up, extend ramp up time.
If the generator torque limit is exceeded during ramp down, extend ramp downtime.
If torque limit occurs while running, increase the torque limit. Verify the system operation can operate safely at a higher torque.
Compare current output from LCP to the converter’s rated current.
Compare the output shown from the LCP with measured motor current.
Verify the drive load on the LCP. Monitor the value. The counter will increase when running above the continuous current rating. The counter will decrease when running below the continuous current rating.
Check that the supply voltage matches the frequency converter voltage.
If the intermediate circuit voltage drops below the undervoltage limit, the frequency converter checks if a 24V DC backup supply is connected. If no 24V DC backup supply is connected, the converter trips after a fixed time delay. The time delay varies with unit size.
Perform input voltage test.
If the intermediate circuit voltage exceeds the limit, the converter trips after a time.
There is short-circuiting in the motor or motor wiring.
Connect a brake resistor.
Extend the ramp time.
Change the ramp type.
Activate the functions in 2-10 Brake Function.
Increase 14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault.
If the alarm/warning occurs during a power sag, the solution is to use kinetic back-up (14-10 Mains Failure).
Remove power to the frequency converter and repair the short circuit.
115
24V Supply
Low
Problem
Mains Phase
Loss
U Phase Loss
V Phase Loss
W Phase Loss
Mains Fail
Safe Stop
Start Fail
Speed Limit
Current Limit
Potential Cause Corrective Action
A phase is missing on the supply side, or the mains voltage imbalance is too high.
This message also appears for a fault in the input rectifier on the frequency converter.
Options are programmed at parameter 14-12.
The “U” output terminal signal is lost.
The “V” output terminal signal is lost.
The “W” output terminal signal is lost.
Check the supply voltage and supply currents to the frequency converter.
Refer to
“Compressor Drive Input/Output (VFD-02)” on page 124 .
Refer to
“Compressor Drive Input/Output (VFD-02)” on page 124 .
Check wiring.
The 24V DC is measured on the control card. The external
24V DC backup power supply maybe overloaded.
This warning/alarm is only active if the supply voltage to the frequency converter is lost and parameter 14-10 is NOT set to [0] No Function.
Loss of the 24V DC signal on terminal 37 has caused the filter to trip.
The speed has not been able to exceed parameter 1-77 during start within the allowed time.
When the speed is not within the specified range in parameters 4-11 and 4-13, the converter shows a warning.
When the speed is below the specified limit in parameter 1-86
(except when starting or stopping), the frequency converter will trip.
The current is higher than the value in 4-18 Current Limit.
Ensure that the motor data in parameters 1-20 to 1-25 are set correctly. Possibly increase the current limit. Be sure that the system can operate safely at a higher limit.
Check backup supply.
Check the fuses to the frequency converter and mains power supply to the unit.
Apply 24V DC to terminal 37 and reset the filter.
Motor may be locked.
This alarm is reset automatically, and the compressor restarts automatically.
Make sure that motor data in parameters 1-20 to 1-25 are set correctly.
Possibly increase the current limit. Be sure that the system can operate safely at a higher limit.
116
Compressor Troubleshooting Chart
Problem
Compressor will not start
Compressor runs intermittently
Compressor cycles on overload
Compressor making abnormal noise
Low suction pressure
Compressor oil issues
Potential Cause Corrective Action
Shorted or broken wires
Locked rotor
Low voltage
Internal failure
Shorted or broken wires
Use a multi-meter to check the compressor wiring harness for an open or short circuit.
Check continuity of the compressor. Replace if failed.
Test voltage.
If no other failure is present, there is an internal failure.
Replace the compressor.
Check the compressor wiring harness for an open or short circuit.
Loose connections Secure connections.
Shorted or grounded compressor Check for continuity from the compressor terminals to ground.
There should be no continuity.
Overcharge of refrigerant
Dirty outdoor coil
Recover part of the refrigerant.
Clean the outdoor coil.
Incorrect thermostat location Relocate thermostat.
Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) Verify the correct expansion valve is installed.
Hot Gas Reheat Valve Refer to
“Hot Gas Reheat Valve (HG-1/HG-2)” on page 131 .
Faulty reversing valve
Defrost control
Shortage of refrigerant
Restricted discharge line
Non-condensables in system
Low charge
Restricted discharge line, drier, or reversing valve
Low oil
Test reversing valve.
Test defrost control.
Test for leak. Recharge.
Repair or replace as needed.
Recover the charge, evacuate the system. Recharge the system.
Recirculation of condensing air Remove airflow obstruction.
Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV) Make sure the expansion valve is operating properly.
Overcharge of refrigerant
Loose hardware
Recover part of the refrigerant.
Tighten the mounting bolts.
Internal failure
Liquid in compressor head
If no other failure is present, replace the compressor.
Check “Superheat and Subcooling” on page 120
and EEV position.
Check “Superheat and Subcooling” on page 120 .
Repair as needed.
Imbalance of refrigerant
Compressor running too slow for a long period of time
If sight glass is available, check oil level. Add oil.
If there is an oil level sensor. Refer to “Oil Level
Check “Superheat and Subcooling” on page 120 .
Adjust compressor speed.
117
Airflow Troubleshooting Chart
Problem
Fan Inoperative
Motor Overload
Potential Cause
Blown fuse/Open circuit breaker
Disconnect switch in “Off” position
Door switch
Motor wired incorrectly
Motor starter overloaded
HMI set to “Blower Off”
Fan rotating in the wrong direction
Fan speed is too high
Motor wired incorrectly
Corrective Action
Replace fuse or reset circuit breaker and check amps.
Turn to “On” position.
Verify door is closed properly.
Check door switch wiring and switch.
Check motor wiring to wiring diagram located on fan motor.
Reset starter and check amps.
Set HMI to “Blower On.”
Verify fan is rotating in the direction shown on rotation label.
Reduce fan RPM.
Check motor wiring to wiring diagram located on fan motor.
Check the fan wiring.
Check fan rotation using the HMI.
Overload in starter set too low
Motor HP too low
Duct static pressure lower than design
Fan rotating in the wrong direction
Set overload to motor FLA value.
Determine if HP is sufficient for job.
Reduce fan RPM.
Verify fan is rotating in the direction shown on rotation label.
Check the fan wiring.
Insufficient Airflow
Poor outlet conditions
Intake damper not fully open
Duct static pressure higher than design
Check fan rotation using the HMI.
There should be a straight clear duct at the outlet.
Inspect damper linkage and replace damper motor if needed.
Improve ductwork to eliminate or reduce duct losses.
Increase fan RPM. Do not overload motor.
Excessive Airflow
Fan speed too low
Indoor coil dirty or frozen
Supply grills or registers closed
Dirty or clogged filters
Fan speed to high
Filters not installed
Duct static pressure lower than design
Fan speed is too high
Excessive Vibration and
Noise
Damaged or unbalanced wheel
Fan is operating in the unstable region of the fan curve
Clean Indoor Coil and filters.
Open and adjust.
Clean and/or replace.
Reduce fan RPM.
Install filters.
Reduce fan RPM.
Reduce fan RPM.
Replace wheel.
Refer to performance curve for fan.
Bearings need lubrication or replacement Lubricate or replace.
118
Furnace Troubleshooting Chart
Problem Potential Cause Corrective Action
Furnace Does Not
Light/Stay Lit
Not Enough Heat
Main gas is off
Shut off valve closed
ON/OFF gas valve is off
Open main gas valve.
Open shut off valve.
Turn ON/OFF gas valve on.
Gas pressure out of range
Air in gas line
No spark at igniter
Defective flame safety controller
Adjust to proper gas pressure.
Purge gas line.
Dirt in burner orifices Clean orifices with compressed air.
Spark igniter rod out of position Relocate spark igniter rod to proper area.
Refer to
“Flame Safety Control (FSC-01)” on page 129 .
Excessive drafts
Safety device has cut power
Re-direct draft away from unit.
Check limits.
Check airflow switch and tubing at the MUA board.
Clean flame sensor.
Dirty flame sensor
Defective flame sensor
Defective valve
Main gas pressure too low
Change heating set-points to call for heat.
Refer to
“Gas Valves” on
.
Loose gas valve wiring
Thermostat not calling for heat Change heating set-points to call for heat.
Unit cycling on high limit Check gas pressure. Increase airflow through furnace, if required.
Increase main gas pressure – do not exceed 14 in. wc inlet pressure.
Unit locked into low fire
Too much airflow
Furnace undersized
Check wiring or modulating valve settings. Refer to
“Furnace Start-Up Summary” on page 79
.
Decrease airflow if possible.
Check design conditions.
Gas controls not wired properly Refer to “Gas Valves” on
.
Thermostat setting too low Increase thermostat setting.
Too Much Heat
Lifting Flames or
Flashback
Thermostat malfunction Check thermostat.
Defective modulating gas valve Check/replace modulating valve.
Thermostat setting too high
Unit locked into high fire
Thermostat wired incorrectly
Decrease thermostat setting.
Check modulation valve settings. Refer to
.
Check thermostat wiring.
Too much primary air Reduce primary air.
Manifold pressure set too high Reduce manifold pressure.
Dirty orifice
Orifice too large
Check and clean orifice.
Check orifice size.
Insufficient primary air
Yellow Tipping Flames Misaligned orifice
Insufficient primary air
Orifice too large
Floating Flames or
Flame Rollout
Manifold pressure too high
Blocked vent
Misaligned orifice
Increase primary air.
Check manifold alignment.
Increase primary air.
Check orifice size.
Decrease manifold pressure.
Check venting system.
Check manifold alignment.
119
Superheat and Subcooling
Temperature (°F)
-25
-20
-15
-10
-45
-40
-35
-30
-5
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
Table 16 - R410A Pressure Temperature
Refrigerant Pressure Temperature (°F)
78.7
87.8
97.5
107.9
118.9
130.7
143.3
7.7
10.8
14.1
17.8
21.9
26.3
31.2
36.5
42.2
48.2
95
100
55
62.3
105
110
70.2 115
75
80
85
90
55
60
65
70
120
125
130
135
140
145
150
Refrigerant Pressure
156.6
170.7
185.8
201.8
218.7
236.5
255.4
275.4
296.4
318.6
341.9
366.4
392.3
419.4
447.9
447.9
509.4
542.5
577.3
613.9
When determining superheat, use Table 16
to convert the low side pressure gauge (suction line) to the appropriate temperature. Subtract the converted temperature from the suction line surface temperature.
There should be approximately a 20°F difference. Superheat monitors what state the refrigerant is when it leaves the evaporator coil. High superheat indicates the refrigerant has picked up more heat than designed. Low superheat indicates the refrigerant has not picked up enough heat and can cause flooding in the compressor. If superheat is incorrect, verify subcool first before making changes to the system.
When determining subcool, convert the high side pressure gauge (condensing coil liquid line) to the appropriate temperature. Subtract the converted temperature from the liquid line surface temperature.
There should be approximately a 10-20°F difference. Subcooling monitors what state the refrigerant is when it leaves the condensing coil. High subcooling means the condenser is flooded. Low subcooling means the condenser is starving.
• If the superheat is high and the subcool is low under normal operating conditions, the system may be low on charge. Determine the cause of low refrigerant and repair as necessary. Refer to
System Low on Refrigerant” on page 109
.
• If the superheat is low and the subcool is high under normal operating conditions, the system may be
overcharged. Refer to “Recovering Refrigerant from the System” on page 106
.
• If the superheat is high and the subcool is high under normal operating conditions, there could be a blockage in the coil, or line set.
NOTE: Ambient temperatures may affect subcooling.
120
Component Check/Testing
On-board Airflow Sensor
1. Verify the tubing to the on-board sensor is connected. Confirm there are no kinks, cracks, or damage to the tubing. Replace tubing if needed.
2. With the unit ON, set the blower to “Manual” through the HMI. Go to Factory Settings > Unit Options
> Blower Config > Blower Control > Manual .
3. Use the HMI to modulate the blower speed to achieve system’s minimum design CFM. Go to User
Settings > Fan Speed to adjust blower frequency or percentage.
4. Monitor the static pressure on the HMI through the service menu for at least one minute. Go to Service
> Variable Values > Inputs > Onbd PS .
5. Record the lowest pressure reading.
6. Set the “PS Set Point” to 0.05” w.c. below the lowest static pressure reading that is observed. Go to
Factory Settings > Unit Options > Blower Config > Airflow Proving > PS Set Point .
Example: If the lowest pressure reading observed is 0.20” w.c., set the “PS Set Point” to 0.15” w.c.
Figure 59 - Board Airflow Sensor
H1 L2
PS1
High Pressure
Tubing
Low Pressure
Tubing
121
Clogged Filter Switch (PS-10)
1. The vent tube should be connected to the low side port ( Figure 60
). A fault will occur when the switch senses a negative pressure.
2. If the “Clogged Filters” fault is active:
• Check the filters. If the filters are clogged or damaged, replace as needed. Check for any other obstructions in the unit.
• Verify the electrical connections are secure and tight. Verify vent tube is not pinched or damaged.
• When the unit is powered ON:
- There should be 24-28V AC at connector J13 pin 5 to ground. If the voltage reading is incorrect, check the wiring harness and voltage at the circuit board.
- There should be 0V AC at connector J13 pin 12 to ground. If there is voltage at pin 12, check the adjustment of the switch.
Clogged Filter Switch Field Adjustment
Follow these steps if performing a part replacement, or to calibrate the switch.
• Install the switch. Install the vent tube on the low side port.
• Install the electrical connections. Power the unit ON. Set dampers to 100% open for outdoor air.
Monitor the HMI screen.
• Use a screwdriver to turn the adjustment screw clockwise until it is completely seated in the switch.
Use material suitable to block 50-75% of the intake from the outside of the unit.
Turn the adjustment screw counter-clockwise in one turn increments (waiting 3 seconds per adjustment) until the “Clogged Filters” fault is active. Turn the adjustment screw a 1/4 to 1/2 turn clockwise until the fault is no longer active.
Figure 60 - Clogged Filter Switch
Low Side
(Front)
Normally Closed
Normally Open
Common
Adjustment Screw
NO
PS-10
C
BR
J13
5
PR
12
122
Low Refrigeration Pressure Switch (SW-15)
1. For the low pressure switch (
), insert a back probe tool at connector J36 pin 1 and pin 2.
Power the unit ON. Check for voltage at the following pins:
Figure 61 - Low Refrigeration Pressure Switch
• J36 pin 1 to ground. There should be 24-28V AC .
• J36 pin 2 to ground. There should be 24-28V AC .
- If the voltage is incorrect, continue to step 2.
- If the voltage is correct, the system may need to be
charged. Refer to “Monitoring the A/C System” on page 105 .
2. Check the electrical circuit. Power the unit OFF.
Check for continuity in the wiring harness.
• J36 pin 1 to pin 2. There should be continuity.
• J36 pin 1 to ground. There should be no continuity.
• J36 pin 2 to ground. There should be no continuity.
- If any of the continuity readings are incorrect, verify the wiring is not damaged. If no damage is found, replace the low pressure switch.
- If all of the continuity readings are correct, there may be an issue with transformer.
J36 2
SW-15
SW-15
BK
1
BK
High Refrigeration Pressure Switch (SW-16)
1. If a high pressure switch (
) failure occurred, manually reset the switch.
2. For the high pressure switch, insert a back probe tool at connector J36 pin 3 and pin 4. Power the unit
ON. Check for voltage at the following pins:
Figure 62 - High Refrigeration Pressure Switch
SW-16
• J36 pin 3 to ground. There should be 24-28V AC .
• J36 pin 4 to ground. There should be 24-28V AC .
- If the voltage is incorrect, continue to step 3.
- If the voltage is correct, the system maybe
overcharged. Refer to “Monitoring the A/C
3. Check the electrical circuit. Power the unit OFF.
Check for continuity in the wiring harness.
• J36 pin 3 to pin 4. There should be continuity.
• J36 pin 3 to ground. There should be no continuity.
• J36 pin 4 to ground. There should be no continuity.
- If any of the continuity readings are incorrect, verify the wiring is not damaged. If no damage is found, replace the high pressure switch.
- If all of the continuity readings are correct, there may be an issue with transformer.
J36
SW-16
4
BK
3
BK
123
Compressor Drive Input/Output (VFD-02)
1. Power the unit OFF. Verify there is no damage to the wiring. Make sure all connections are secure and connected. Verify wiring connections to the schematic. Refer to
for details.
2. Verify the unit is OFF. Check for open or short circuits in the wiring harness.
3. Power the unit ON. Check for voltage at the following terminals:
• Terminal L1 to ground. Verify reading to nameplate voltage.
• Terminal L2 to ground. Verify reading to nameplate voltage.
• Terminal L3 to ground. Verify reading to nameplate voltage.
• Terminal T1/U to ground. Voltage will vary with compressor speed.
• Terminal T2/V to ground. Voltage will vary with compressor speed.
• Terminal T3/W to ground. Voltage will vary with compressor speed.
Figure 63 - Compressor Drive
91
L1
92
L2
95
93
L3
CDS 302
96 U
97 V
98 W
99
T1
T2
T3
95 Input Ground
L1 (91) 3 Phase Input or Single Phase Input
L2 (92) 3 Phase Input or Single Phase Input
L3 (93) 3 Phase Input
T1 (96) Compressor
T2 (97)
T3 (98)
99
Compressor
Compressor
Compressor Ground
Humidity Temperature Sensor
Intake (HUM-1)/Space (HUM-2)/Discharge (HUM-3)
Refer to Figure 64 for component locations. Check the following:
1. Verify the wiring is connected properly to the terminal block.
2. Verify the DIP switches are set properly. Make sure switch 7 and 8 are ON.
3. Check the wiring is connected properly at the switch.
4. Make sure all the connections are clean, and that there is no condensation on the RH sensor circuit board.
Figure 64 - Humidity/Temperature Sensors
HUM-1 INTAKE
HUM-1
SPACE
HUM-2
BK RD WH
O N
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Sensor
Plug
J14
1
AI-2
DISCH
HUM-3
AI-3
8
BK
WH
RD
HUM-3 J31
9 8 7
124
Temperature Sensor
Intake (SN-01)/Return (SN-02)/Outdoor (SN-03)/Discharge (SN-04)/Space (HUM-2)
Refer to
component locations. Check the following:
1. Make sure the unit is OFF.
2. Make sure the wires are connected properly.
3. Measure the resistance of the temperature sensor. Use the temperature/ohm chart to determine your readings.
• SN-01 – J15 pin 1 to pin 2
• SN-02 – J15 pin 3 to pin 4
• SN-03 – J15 pin 5 to pin 6
• SN-04 – J15 pin 7 to pin 8
• HUM-2 – J15 pin 9 to pin 10
- If there is 0 ohms , the sensor or wires are shorted.
- If there is infinite (OL) ohms , the sensor or wires are open.
If the sensor or wiring has failed, replace the sensor.
NOTE: SN-03 is located behind the damper assembly.
Figure 65 - Temperature Sensors
SN-03
SN-02
SN-01
SN-04
Temperature Ohm 10k
-20
-10
165k
117k
0 85k
10
20
62k
46k
30 34k
40
50
60
26k
19k
15k
70
80
90
100
11k
9k
7k
5k
1
J15
10
GR
RD
SN-01
INTAKE
SN-02
RETURN
SN-03
OUTDOOR
SN-04
-
DISCHARGE
+
HUM-2
SPACE
125
High Gas Pressure Switch (PS-03)
1. Turn the unit ON. Reset the lever on the switch. Gas pressure must be lower in the chamber for the reset latch to be set properly. Verify the high gas pressure switch is set to 12 in. w.c.
3. Verify the ON/OFF gas valve, and modulating valve is set properly. Refer to “Start-Up Procedure
4. Check for voltage:
• Back probe connector J13 pin 4 to ground. There should be 24-28V AC .
• Back probe connector J13 pin 11 to ground. There should be 24-28V AC .
- If the voltage reading is incorrect, check the wiring for an open or short circuit. If the wiring is correct, the switch has failed. Replace the switch.
- If the voltage reading is correct, and the switch reset corrected the fault, there may have been an intermittent fault.
Figure 66 - High Gas Pressure Switch
C
NO
NC
NC
PS-03
C
BL
4
Connector J13
11
Low Gas Pressure Switch (PS-04)
1. Turn the unit ON. Verify the inlet pressure gauge is reading the correct pressure.
• Natural gas - 7 in. w.c. – 14 in. w.c
.
• Propane - 11 in. w.c. – 14 in. w.c.
NOTE: If the reading is incorrect, contact the gas supply company .
2. Reset the lever on the switch. Gas pressure must be higher in the chamber for the reset latch to be set properly. If the reset did not work, continue with the next step.
3. Remove the cover. Make sure the wiring is set up for Normally Open (N.O.) contact (
).
4. Check for voltage:
• Back probe connector J13 pin 3 to ground. There should be 24-28V AC .
• Back probe connector J13 pin 10 to ground. There should be 0V AC .
- If the voltage reading is incorrect, check the wiring for an open or short circuit. If the wiring is correct, the switch has failed. Replace the switch.
- If the voltage reading is correct, and the switch reset corrected the fault, there may have been an intermittent fault.
Figure 67 - Low Gas Pressure Switch
C
NO
NC
C
PS-04
NO
BL
3
Connector J13
10
126
Vent Proving Switch (PS-01)
1. Verify wiring is connected properly.
2. Check that the vent tubing is routed correctly. Make sure the tube is not pinched or clogged.
3. Verify the bleed hole is not clogged (
). The bleed hole reduces condensation build-up in the switch and tubing.
4. Make sure the unit is OFF. Check the switch. Remove electrical connections. Check for continuity between pin “C” to pin “NO”. There should be no continuity.
- If there is continuity, the switch has failed. Replace the switch.
- If there is no continuity, re-connect the electrical connections. Continue to the next step.
5. Connect a manometer between the pressure switch and hose. Turn the unit ON. Monitor the manometer. Verify the value ( w.c.
) on the switch is correct.
- If the reading is above the value, continue to the next step.
6. With the unit ON. Check for voltage:
• Back probe connector J7 pin 14 to ground. There should be 24-28V AC .
• Back probe connector J7 pin 10 to ground. There should be 24-28V AC .
- If the voltage reading is incorrect, check the wiring for an open or short circuit. If the wiring check is correct, the switch has failed. Replace the switch.
- If the voltage reading is correct, there may have been an intermittent fault.
Figure 68 - Vent Proving Switch
Hose to Pressure
Switch
J7
PK
10
Hose to
Manometer
NO C OR
14
PS-01
Bleed
Hole
Hose to Inducer
Oil Level Sensor (Sen-1)
Refer to
“Compressor Information” on page 52 for more
information on oil level sensor ( Figure 69
).
1. Verify the compressor is not running. Remove the oil level sensor from the compressor.
2. Turn the unit ON. Verify the compressor is OFF by pressing
OFF on the LCP panel.
3. Go to Service > Open/Closed Status > Inputs > Oil Sensor: The status should be NC.
- If the OLS diagnostic tool (120Z0560) is available, insert tool over the optical sensor. The status should change to NO.
- If the OLS diagnostic tool (120Z0560) is not available, place a light source tightly over the optical sensor. The status should change to NO.
4. Verify checks:
- If the reading does not change, replace the sensor.
- If the reading changes (sensor is good), and an oil boost has not cleared the fault, check for low oil or leaks in the system.
Figure 69 - Oil Level Sensor
SEN-1
GR
J36
9
RD BK WH
8 7
127
Main (On/Off) Gas Valve (VA-01)
The main gas valve ( Figure 70 ) is located in the burner cabinet.
Units that use 500MBH and larger furnaces are equipped with two shut-off valves internal to a single body.
1. Make sure the wiring is connected properly.
2. Make sure the gas valve is ON.
3. Turn the unit ON. Check for voltage. Check for voltage across the pins on the gas valve. There should be 24-28V AC .
- If the voltage reading is incorrect, check the wiring for an open or short circuit.
- If the voltage reading is correct, the gas valve may be faulty.
Figure 70 - Main Gas Valve
Main Gas
Valve
Modulating Gas Valve (VA-05)
Figure 71 - Modulating Gas Valve
The modulating gas valve (
Figure 71 ) is located in the main
burner cabinet.
1. Make sure the wiring is connected properly. Check the wiring using a multi-meter for open or short circuits.
• Terminal 1 – Signal ( + ) to J7 pin 6
• Terminal 2 – Signal ( ) to J7 pin 7
• Terminal 3 – Power 24V DC ( + ) to H4
• Terminal 4 – Power ( ) to N4
- If any damaged wiring is found, repair or replace.
- If any open or short circuits are found, repair or replace.
- If any wiring is connected incorrectly, correct the wiring.
NOTE: The wiring connection is polarity sensitive.
STP Wire
RD
2. Make sure the DIP switches are all in the OFF position
(factory setting). This will set the valve to receive a 0-10V
DC signal. If the unit is set up for an analog control
.
3. Make sure the valve has been adjusted properly. Refer to
“Start-Up Procedure Heating” on page 79
.
4. If the unit has been running, restart the unit. Check for voltage:
RD
GY
BK
P2 P1
RD
VA-05
BK
SHD
J7
8 7 6
• Connector J7 pin 6 to ground. There should be 10V DC . The voltage reading will drop after the unit has been running.
• Check for voltage between H4 to N4 on the terminal block. There should be 24-28V AC . This voltage reading will be constant.
- If the voltage reading is incorrect, check voltage to the IBT control board.
- If the voltage reading is correct, there may be an issue with the modulating valve.
128
Flame Safety Control (FSC-01)
The FSC is located in the main control cabinet.
1. Verify wiring and connections are properly connected (
).
2. Turn the unit ON. Use the HMI to set the unit in test mode.
• Service > Test Menu > Test Heating > Run Low Fire Test > Stages All
• Refer to
“Flame Safety Control (FSC)” on page 82
for operation of sequence.
Determine the symptom below:
Symptom
Control does not start
Thermostat ON – no spark
Blower ON – no Trial For Ignition (TFI) after purge delay
Valve ON – no spark during TFI
Spark ON – valve OFF
Flame during TFI – no flame sensed after TFI
Action
• Check wiring.
• Check for a 24V AC transformer failure.
• Check circuit breaker.
• Check LED light.
• Check wiring to thermostat input (TH).
• Faulty thermostat.
• Check LED light.
• Check wiring.
• Check for flame fault.
• Air flow fault, check tubes and connections to
MUA Board airflow switch.
• Check connection at PSW terminal.
• Faulty control (Check voltage between L1 and
IND. There should be 24V AC ).
• Check wiring.
• Shorted ignitor electrode.
• Check cable to ignitor.
• Check wiring.
• Valve coil open.
• Check voltage at V1.
• Check flame rod position.
• Check cable to flame rod.
• Poor ground connection at burner.
• Poor flame.
3. Turn the unit ON. If the LED is blinking, verify the fault:
• Steady ON = Internal controller failure
• 1 flash = Airflow fault. 2 flashes = Flame without call for heat. 3 flashes = Ignition lock out
Figure 72 - FSC Wiring
GTO WIRE
OR
FSC-01
FR-01
J7
9 8 7
18 17 16
6 5 4
15 14 13
3
12
2 1
11 10
129
Intake Damper Motor Assembly (MT-06)
1. Verify the wiring is correct.
2. Check the wiring for open or short circuits.
3. Verify the positive signal from J18 pin 2 is connected to the assembly at pin 3.
4. Verify the negative signal from J18 pin 9 is connected to the assembly at pin 1.
5. Test the damper rotation. Turn the unit ON. Use the HMI to monitor the movement of the damper.
• User Settings > Outdoor Air Voltage > 10V (default).
• Adjust the voltage setting and monitor the damper movement.
- If the damper movement and voltage reading are correct, test is complete.
- If the damper movement and voltage reading are incorrect, continue to the next step.
6. Check transformer voltages.
- If there is an issue with the transformer or wiring, repair or replace.
- If the transformer check is good, check for mechanical failures.
Field installation/adjustment
1. Rotate the damper shaft to its fail-safe position (closed). Mount the actuator with the counterclockwise
“CCW” out. Refer to
.
2. If the universal clamp is not on the correct side of the actuator, move it to the correct side.
3. Slide the actuator onto the shaft. Position the clamp so that the pointer of the tab is at the top of the rotation.
4. Lock the clamp to the actuator using the retaining clip.
5. Tighten the nuts on the V-bolt. Torque to 6-8 ft-lb .
6. Secure to strap.
7. Make sure the rotation is set correctly. Y = 0 set to CCW.
8. Test the spring return damper rotation.
• You can use the crank handle to test manually.
• Turn the unit ON. Use the HMI to monitor the movement of the damper.
• Service > Test Menu > Test Misc > Outdoor Air
• Adjust the voltage setting and monitor the damper movement. 0V – Outdoor air dampers closed ;
10V – Outdoor air dampers open .
- If the damper operates properly, the installation is correct.
- If the damper operates incorrectly, adjust as required. If adjustment cannot be made, check the wiring is correct. Verify to the unit’s wiring schematics.
Figure 73 - Intake Damper Motor Assembly
35° ... 95°
CCW
CCW
9
.2
.8
CCW CW
130
Hot Gas Reheat Valve (HG-1/HG-2)
Units with a single reheat valve, HG-1 will be a three-way valve. Units that use dual reheat valves will have HG-1 inline to the reheat coil inlet and HG-2 in-line to the outdoor
(condensing) coil inlet. Refer to
for valve differences.
Power the unit OFF. Verify there is no damage to the wiring.
Check the wiring connections to the MUA board connector, verify wiring connections to the schematic. Make sure all connections are secure and connected.
Figure 74 - Hot Gas Reheat
In-Line Valve Three-Way Valve
Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV-1)
Figure 75 - EEV Wiring Reference
The Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV-1) wiring (
) is connected to the MUA Board.
WH BK
1. Power the unit OFF. Verify there is no damage to the wiring.
Make sure all connections are secure and connected.
2 1
EEV-01
2. Use a multi-meter to measure the resistance in the electronic expansion valve harness from:
4
J34
• The black wire to white wire. There should be 90-100 ohms .
• The red wire to green wire. There should be 90-100 ohms .
• The white wire to ground. There should be infinite resistance (open circuit).
• The black wire to ground. There should be infinite resistance (open circuit).
3
RD GR
• The red wire to ground. There should be infinite resistance (open circuit).
• The green wire to ground. There should be infinite resistance (open circuit).
- If the readings are incorrect, there may be an issue with the electronic expansion valve. Replace
EEV if necessary.
- If the readings are correct and there are no issues with the electronic expansion valve, there may be an issue with the superheat controller.
131
Power Vent (MT-02)
1. If the power vent motor is not operating properly, power the unit OFF.
2. Verify there is no damage to the vent proving switch or vent tube.
3. Verify there is no damage to the wiring, motor or capacitor. Make sure all connections are secure and connected. Verify wiring connections to the schematic. If damage is found, replace the damaged component(s).
4. Check the motor’s electrical circuit.
For standard furnaces (Figure 76):
Disconnect the wiring connections from pin J17 and pin J21. Power the unit ON. Check for voltage from pin
J17 to pin J21 on the board. There should be 115-120V AC.
- If the voltage reading is incorrect, verify there is 120V AC to the circuit board.
- If the voltage reading is correct, check the motor’s capacitor. If the capacitor is OK, there may be an issue with the power vent motor.
For 400HE (High Efficiency) Furnaces (Figure 76):
1. Power the unit OFF. Check the ground circuit on the five pin connector. Check the ground circuit on the three pin connector. If there is an issue with the ground circuit, repair the circuit. If there is not an issue with the ground circuit, power the unit ON.
2. With the unit powered ON, check for 24V DC between the ( + ) and ( ) terminals. If the voltage reading is incorrect, check the 24V DC power supply.
3. Check the PWM signal from the EC+ to ground. The voltage reading should vary. If the voltage reading is incorrect, verify connections to the circuit board.
4. Check for 120V AC between the H and N terminals. If the voltage reading is incorrect, check the circuit breaker and the main transformer (TR-01).
5. Check the 24V AC HE Furnace Relay (RE-B). When the relay is actuated, check the following:
• Black wire terminal to ground. There should be 120V AC .
• Red wire terminal to ground. The voltage will vary.
- If the voltage reading is incorrect, the relay may have failed.
- If the voltage reading and all other checks are within specifications, there may be an issue with the power vent motor.
Figure 76 - Power Vent Motor
Standard Power Vent High Efficiency Power Vent
132
MAINTENANCE
WARNING: DO NOT ATTEMPT MAINTENANCE ON THIS EQUIPMENT UNTIL THE
ELECTRICAL SUPPLY HAS BEEN COMPLETELY DISCONNECTED AND THE MAIN
GAS SUPPLY VALVE HAS BEEN TURNED OFF.
To guarantee trouble-free operation of this unit, the manufacturer suggests following these guidelines.
Most problems associated with failures are directly related to poor service and maintenance.
Record any maintenance or service performed on this unit in the documentation section located at the end of this manual.
General Maintenance
• Fan inlet and approaches to ventilator and coils should be kept clean and free from any obstruction.
Clean both the indoor and outdoor coils regularly to maintain unit efficiency.
• Motors are normally permanently lubricated. Check bearings periodically. If they have grease fittings, lubricate each season. Use caution when lubricating bearings, wipe the fittings clean, the unit should be rotated by hand while lubricating. Caution: Use care when touching the exterior of an operating motor. Motors normally run hot and may be hot enough to be painful or cause injury.
• All fasteners should be checked for tightness each time maintenance checks are performed prior to restarting unit.
• Fans require very little attention when moving clean air. Occasionally oil and dust may accumulate causing imbalance. If the fan is installed in a corrosive or dirty atmosphere, periodically inspect and clean the wheel, inlet, and other moving parts to ensure smooth and safe operation.
• The Energy Wheel will require very little attention when moving clean air. Occasionally oil and dust may accumulate, degrading performance. If the ERV is installed in a dirty atmosphere, periodically inspect and clean the wheel, belt, and other moving parts to ensure smooth and safe operation.
• Before each heating season, verify that the drain on the bottom of each common flue box of every furnace in the unit is clear.
Every 3 Months
Filters need to be cleaned and/or replaced quarterly, and more often in severe conditions. Washable filters, located in the intake louver or ERV module, can be washed in warm soapy water. When re-installing filters, be sure to install with the same size and rated filter and with airflow in the correct direction as indicated on the filter.
133
Heating Season
• Verify that the drain on the bottom of the flue box in the unit is clear.
• Inspect bolts and set screws for tightness. Tighten as necessary.
• Inspect the wiring on the unit and replace components where necessary.
• Inspect motor for cleanliness. Clean exterior surfaces only. Remove dust and grease from the motor housing to ensure proper motor cooling. Remove dirt and grease from the wheel and housing to prevent imbalance and damage.
• The heat exchanger should be checked for cracks. The heat exchanger should be replaced immediately if cracks are detected. With a soft cloth, remove any built-up dirt or oil on the exterior surface of the heat exchanger.
• Inspect the combustion blower motor for cleanliness. Clean exterior surfaces of the combustion blower motor only. Removing excess dust and grease guarantees proper motor cooling.
• Before each heating season, examine the burner and gas orifices. Inspect burner ports for foreign debris. Check the heat exchanger, and spark igniter for cleanliness. Use a wire brush to remove any soot, dirt, or grease from the burner or orifices.
• If equipped with an ERV, inspect the energy wheel, belt, and drive motor. Inspect for foreign debris or residue build-up, segments of the energy wheel can be removed and washed clean with warm water.
Cooling Season
• Before each cooling season, verify that the drain on the bottom indoor coil drain pan is clear. Inspect bolts and set screws for tightness. Tighten as necessary.
• Inspect the wiring on the unit and replace components where necessary.
• Inspect motor for cleanliness. Clean exterior surfaces only. Remove dust and grease from the motor housing to ensure proper motor cooling. Remove dirt and grease from the wheel and housing to prevent imbalance and damage.
• Inspect the indoor and outdoor coil for dirt and bent fins. Clean or replace as necessary, refer to
Cleaning Procedure” on page 135 .
• Check the outdoor fans for proper rotation and operation. Clean all debris from fan guards.
• Inspect all return air and fresh air dampers and linkage to ensure free operations. Lubricate where necessary.
• With the unit running, check and record the ambient temperature, superheat, compressor suction, and discharge pressures. Record this data on the back of this manual.
• If equipped with an ERV, inspect the energy wheel, belt, and drive motor. Inspect for foreign debris or residue build-up, segments of the energy wheel can be removed and washed clean with warm water.
NOTE: Do NOT release refrigerant to the atmosphere! If adding or removing refrigerant is required, the service technician must comply with all federal, state, and local laws.
Maintenance Quick Reference Chart
Component
Filters
Damper assembly
Drain Pans
Bolts and Screws
Wiring and Electrical
Blower Motor
Heat Exchanger
Power Vent Motor
Burner and Gas Orifices
Indoor/Outdoor Coil
Outdoor Fans
Damper Assembly
Unit Operation
Maintenance Interval
Clean or replaced.
Inspect and clean louvers and gutters.
Clean and clear of obstruction.
Inspect bolts and screws.
ï€
Verify all hardware is secure and tight.
Inspect all wiring, and electrical components.
Inspect motor for cleanliness, and proper rotation.
Inspect for cracks or damage.
Inspect motor for cleanliness.
Every 3 months
Every 3 months
Every heating/cooling season
Every heating/cooling season
Every heating/cooling season
Every heating/cooling season
Every heating/cooling season
Every heating/cooling season
Inspect for cleanliness.
Check for damaged fins and cleanliness of the coil.
Check for proper rotation, operation, and cleanliness.
Inspect the linkage and movement.
Every heating/cooling season
Every heating/cooling season
Every heating/cooling season
Every heating/cooling season
Verify the unit pressures. Refer to
. Every heating/cooling season
134
Coil Cleaning Procedure
Do not use a pressure washer or high-water pressure when cleaning the coil.
Always use water to rinse the coil down before using third party cleaning solutions. The use of cleaning solutions and chemicals should be used cautiously; overuse will cause damage to the equipment. If the coil cannot be cleaned with water only, follow the below procedure to clean the coil.
Caution: Do not use coil cleaning solution without diluting per cleaning solution manufacturer’s dilution ratios and directions. Use a non-acidic, low/mild alkaline cleaner specified for washing and cleaning aluminum/copper coils. Coil cleaners can be aggressive products. If not diluted properly and rinsed thoroughly, damage to equipment will occur.
NOTE: Always wear eye protection, gloves, and other protective clothing when using cleaning solutions. Avoid breathing solution and mist. E-coated coils must be cleaned per the e-coating manufacturer’s instructions.
1. Shut the system OFF. Spray the coil surface with only water before applying the cleaning solution to rinse off loose residue. Allow the water to soak for 10-20 minutes to loosen surface residue.
2. Apply the diluted cleaning solution to the coil.
3. Allow the cleaning solution to saturate the coil for no more than 5 minutes.
4. Thoroughly rinse the cleaning solution from the coil with only warm water (~100°F) until all signs of residue are eliminated (it should not be brackish or contain excessive dissolved minerals). Verify the coil is clean, and no foam deposits are present. Repeat steps 1-4 if the coil is not sufficiently clean.
5. Allow the unit to dry completely prior to turning the electrical power on or returning the unit to service.
6. Always clean the following items thoroughly with water once the system is back to service: tools, sprayer, roof, nearby areas, and equipment that may have come in contact with cleaning solution, etc.
When cleaning coils, specifically where considerable foaming solution deposits are present, it is essential to rinse the coil, equipment, and surrounding areas thoroughly. Many coil cleaners can be aggressive products, and residual left behind can be corrosive and damage equipment.
Extensively rinse coils from the bottom of the equipment and all other surrounding metal surfaces.
Never allow the foam to rest or soak in an area, whether on a roof surface, surrounding areas, or nearby equipment.
Re-Setting of the Furnace Unit
If the flame safety control is locked out (Spark igniter fails or no gas supply), reset the unit by:
1. Turn OFF Power to the unit.
2. Turn Power to the unit back ON.
Emergency Shutdown of Unit
To shut down the unit in the event of an emergency, do the following:
1. Turn power OFF to the unit from main building disconnect.
2. Turn the external disconnect switch to the OFF position.
3. CLOSE the inlet gas valve located on the heater.
Prolonged Shutdown of Unit
For prolonged shutdown, the following steps should be done:
1. Turn the external disconnect switch to the OFF position.
2. CLOSE the inlet gas valve located on the heater.
To re-start the unit, the following steps should be done:
1. Turn the external disconnect switch to the ON position.
2. OPEN the inlet gas valve located on the heater.
135
Filters
Unit Housing Size
Size 1
Size 2
Size 3
Size 4
Table 17 - Louvered Intake Filter Quantity Chart (Washable)
16” x 20” x 2” x x
2 x
16” x 25” x 2”
4 x x x
20” x 20” x 2” x
8 x x
20” x 25” x 2” x x x
2
Unit Housing Size
Size 1 ERV
Size 2 ERV
Size 3 ERV
Size 4 ERV
Unit Housing Size
Size 1
Size 2
Size 3
Size 4
16” x 20” x 2” x
8
4
4
Table 18 - Internal Filter Quantity Chart (Throw Away)
16” x 16” x 2” x x
4 x
16” x 20” x 2” x x x
4
20” x 20” x 2” x x x
12
16” x 25” x 2”
4 x x x
20” x 25” x 2”
4 x x x
Unit Housing
Size
Size 1 ERV
Size 2 ERV
Size 3 ERV
Size 4 ERV
16” x 16” x 2” 16” x 20” x 2” 20” x 20” x 2” 16” x 25” x 2” 25” x 25” x 2” x x
4 x x
4 x
16
4
2 x x x x
8 x x x x x
NOTE: Quantity subject to change based on filter options. Optional 4” thick filters available upon request.
136
Maintenance Record
Date Service Performed
137
Maintenance Record
Date Service Performed
138
Maintenance Record
Date of Visit
Field Measured Information – Initial Readings
Motor Voltage
Motor Amperage*
MUA Blower RPM
Ambient Wet Bulb Temp
Ambient Dry Bulb Temp
Cond 1 Suction Pressure
Cond 1 Suction Temperature
Cond 1 Liquid Pressure
Cond 1 Liquid Temperature
Cond 1 Subcooling
Cond 1 Superheat
Maintenance Record
Date of Visit
Field Measured Information – Initial Readings
Motor Voltage
Motor Amperage*
MUA Blower RPM
Ambient Wet Bulb Temp
Ambient Dry Bulb Temp
Cond 1 Suction Pressure
Cond 1 Suction Temperature
Cond 1 Liquid Pressure
Cond 1 Liquid Temperature
Cond 1 Subcooling
Cond 1 Superheat
Maintenance Record
Date of Visit
Field Measured Information – Initial Readings
Motor Voltage
Motor Amperage*
MUA Blower RPM
Ambient Wet Bulb Temp
Ambient Dry Bulb Temp
Cond 1 Suction Pressure
Cond 1 Suction Temperature
Cond 1 Liquid Pressure
Cond 1 Liquid Temperature
Cond 1 Subcooling
Cond 1 Superheat
PSI
°F
°F
°F
°F
°F
PSI
°F
PSI
°F
°F
°F
°F
°F
PSI
°F
PSI
°F
°F
°F
°F
°F
PSI
°F
Field Measured Information – Final Readings
Motor Voltage
Motor Amperage*
MUA Blower RPM
Ambient Wet Bulb Temp
Ambient Dry Bulb Temp
Cond 1 Suction Pressure
Cond 1 Suction Temperature
Cond 1 Liquid Pressure
Cond 1 Liquid Temperature
Cond 1 Subcooling
Cond 1 Superheat
Field Measured Information – Final Readings
Motor Voltage
Motor Amperage*
MUA Blower RPM
Ambient Wet Bulb Temp
Ambient Dry Bulb Temp
Cond 1 Suction Pressure
Cond 1 Suction Temperature
Cond 1 Liquid Pressure
Cond 1 Liquid Temperature
Cond 1 Subcooling
Cond 1 Superheat
Field Measured Information – Final Readings
Motor Voltage
Motor Amperage*
MUA Blower RPM
Ambient Wet Bulb Temp
Ambient Dry Bulb Temp
Cond 1 Suction Pressure
Cond 1 Suction Temperature
Cond 1 Liquid Pressure
Cond 1 Liquid Temperature
Cond 1 Subcooling
Cond 1 Superheat
PSI
°F
°F
°F
°F
°F
PSI
°F
PSI
°F
°F
°F
°F
°F
PSI
°F
PSI
°F
°F
°F
°F
°F
PSI
°F
*
If measured amps exceed the FLA rating on the nameplate, fan RPM must be reduced to decrease the measured amps below the nameplate FLA rating.
139
Start-Up and Maintenance Documentation
START-UP AND MEASUREMENTS SHOULD BE PERFORMED AFTER THE SYSTEM HAS BEEN AIR
BALANCED AND WITH THE COOLING ON (Warranty will be void without completion of this form).
Job Information
Job Name
Address
City
State
Zip
Phone Number
Fax Number
Contact
Purchase Date
Service Company
Address
City
State
Zip
Phone Number
Fax Number
Contact
Start-up Date
Unit Information
Name Plate and Unit Information
Model Number
Serial Number
Unit Voltage
Unit Hertz
Unit Phase
Unit FLA
Unit Supply HP
Gas Type
Min. Btu/Hr
Max. Btu/Hr
Measured Temp Rise
Field Measure Information
Motor Voltage
Motor Amperage*
MUA Blower RPM
Ambient Wet Bulb Temp
Ambient Dry Bulb Temp
Cond 1 Suction Pressure
Cond 1 Suction Temperature
Cond 1 Liquid Pressure
Cond 1 Liquid Temperature
Cond 1 Subcooling
(°F) Cond 1 Superheat
Airflow Direction - Correct or Incorrect?
PSI
(°F)
(°F)
(°F)
(°F)
(°F)
PSI
(°F)
Maintenance Record
Date of Visit
Field Measured Information – Initial Readings
Motor Voltage
Motor Amperage*
MUA Blower RPM
Ambient Wet Bulb Temp
Ambient Dry Bulb Temp
Cond 1 Suction Pressure
Cond 1 Suction Temperature
Cond 1 Liquid Pressure
Cond 1 Liquid Temperature
Cond 1 Subcooling
Cond 1 Superheat
PSI
°F
°F
°F
°F
°F
PSI
°F
Field Measured Information – Final Readings
Motor Voltage
Motor Amperage*
MUA Blower RPM
Ambient Wet Bulb Temp
Ambient Dry Bulb Temp
Cond 1 Suction Pressure
Cond 1 Suction Temperature
Cond 1 Liquid Pressure
Cond 1 Liquid Temperature
Cond 1 Subcooling
Cond 1 Superheat
PSI
°F
°F
°F
°F
°F
PSI
°F
*
If measured amps exceed the FLA rating on the nameplate, fan RPM must be reduced to decrease the measured amps below the nameplate FLA rating.
As a result of our dedication to constant improvements and quality, the MANUFACTURER reserves the right to update specifications without notice. Please refer to MANUFACTURER’S website for up to date documentation.
Factory Service Department | Phone: 1-866-784-6900 | Fax: 1-919-554-9374
140
advertisement
Related manuals
advertisement
Table of contents
- 4 WARRANTY
- 4 Coastal Applications
- 4 Furnace Warranty
- 4 CERTIFICATIONS
- 4 Listings and Standards
- 5 INSTALLATION
- 5 Mechanical
- 5 Inspection on Arrival
- 5 Unloading/Moving Unit
- 5 Unit Location - Site Preparation
- 8 Rigging
- 9 Curb and Ductwork
- 11 Duct Hanger Dimensions
- 13 Curb and Adapter
- 14 Supply Duct Pad Mount Clearances
- 15 Duct Static Pressure Control
- 16 Typical Submittal Drawing
- 17 Furnace Condensation Drain
- 18 Cooling Coil Trap
- 18 Heat Drain Kit
- 19 Gas
- 19 High Turndown Furnace
- 20 Strainer
- 21 High Altitude and Gas Type Orifice Sizing
- 23 LP Conversion Kit for RTU Series
- 24 Pre-Conversion Unit Check-Out
- 25 Gas Conversion Instruction
- 26 Electrical
- 27 Building to Unit Power Wiring Connection
- 27 Site Preparation – Controls
- 28 HMI and Remote Room Sensor Installation
- 29 Typical Wiring Schematic
- 30 Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)
- 30 Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Installation
- 30 Input AC Power
- 31 VFD Output Power
- 31 VFD Programming
- 32 ACTECH SMV VFD
- 33 Make-up Air (MUA) Board Connectors
- 44 Optional Components
- 44 AC Interlock
- 44 Burner Interlock
- 44 Electric Cabinet Heater
- 44 Component Location
- 51 Electric Heater Option
- 52 Compressor Information
- 52 VZH 044/035/028
- 52 Compressor VZH 065
- 53 Compressor VZH 088/117/170
- 54 Compressor Drive Information
- 54 CDS803 Quick Menu Navigation
- 54 CDS803 Main Menu Navigation
- 55 CDS302/303 Quick Menu navigation
- 55 CDS302/303 Main Menu
- 56 OPERATION
- 56 HMI Configuration Menu Access
- 56 Remote (HMI) Control Panel
- 56 HMI Notification Letters
- 57 Configuring HMI
- 57 Communication
- 57 Advanced Options
- 57 Status
- 57 About
- 58 Scheduling
- 58 Fan Speed and Damper Position Presets
- 59 Menu Descriptions
- 78 UNIT OPERATION
- 78 Start-Up Procedure
- 79 Start-Up Procedure Heating
- 79 Furnace Start-Up Summary
- 79 High Fire Burner Adjustment
- 80 Low-Fire Burner Adjustment
- 80 Final Start-Up Procedure
- 81 Sequence of Operation
- 81 Operation Summary - Gas Heating
- 82 Flame Safety Control (FSC)
- 82 Modulating Stage Sequence
- 82 MUA Board and High Fire Start
- 83 Re-Circulating Control Options
- 83 Powered Exhaust
- 83 Outdoor Air Configuration
- 83 Programmable Thermostat
- 84 Heating, Cooling, Defrost, and Reheat
- 87 Economizer
- 88 Psychrometric Chart
- 88 Fixed Dry Bulb Economizer
- 88 Differential Dry Bulb Economizer
- 89 Fixed Total Economizer
- 89 Differential Total Economizer
- 90 Energy Recovery (Optional)
- 90 Purge and Pressurization
- 91 Drive Motor
- 91 Frost Protection (Optional)
- 91 Variable Speed Frost Prevention
- 91 Energy Recovery Exhaust Hoods
- 91 Exhaust Fan
- 91 Slide-Out Wheel
- 92 Field Installation of Large ERVs
- 94 Network
- 94 BACnet
- 95 Device Instance, MAC Address, Baud Rate
- 96 Changing the IP Address
- 97 LonWorks
- 98 DDC Control Points (BACnet)
- 102 DDC Notes
- 103 DDC Faults
- 105 SERVICE INFORMATION
- 105 Basic Service
- 105 Monitoring the A/C System
- 106 Monitoring with Gauge Set
- 106 Recovering Refrigerant from the System
- 107 Nitrogen Purging
- 107 Pressure Testing
- 107 Evacuating the System
- 108 Charging an Empty System
- 109 Charging System Low on Refrigerant
- 109 Removing Manifold Gauge Set
- 110 Troubleshooting
- 110 System Troubleshooting Chart
- 111 HMI Fault Codes
- 115 Compressor Drive VFD Troubleshooting Chart
- 117 Compressor Troubleshooting Chart
- 118 Airflow Troubleshooting Chart
- 119 Furnace Troubleshooting Chart
- 120 Superheat and Subcooling
- 121 Component Check/Testing
- 121 On-board Airflow Sensor
- 122 Clogged Filter Switch (PS-10)
- 123 Low Refrigeration Pressure Switch (SW-15)
- 123 High Refrigeration Pressure Switch (SW-16)
- 124 Compressor Drive Input/Output (VFD-02)
- 124 Humidity Temperature Sensor
- 125 Temperature Sensor
- 126 High Gas Pressure Switch (PS-03)
- 126 Low Gas Pressure Switch (PS-04)
- 127 Vent Proving Switch (PS-01)
- 127 Oil Level Sensor (Sen-1)
- 128 Main (On/Off) Gas Valve (VA-01)
- 128 Modulating Gas Valve (VA-05)
- 129 Flame Safety Control (FSC-01)
- 130 Intake Damper Motor Assembly (MT-06)
- 131 Hot Gas Reheat Valve (HG-1/HG-2)
- 131 Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV-1)
- 132 Power Vent (MT-02)
- 133 MAINTENANCE
- 133 General Maintenance
- 133 Every 3 Months
- 134 Heating Season
- 134 Cooling Season
- 134 Maintenance Quick Reference Chart
- 135 Coil Cleaning Procedure
- 136 Filters
- 140 Start-Up and Maintenance Documentation